JP2022168282A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To increase interest in a game by variably displaying an object in a game machine.

SOLUTION: A game machine provided with display control means for performing a variable display game by variably displaying a symbol object on a display device includes: a transparent member disposed at the front of the game machine; and a game machine component disposed at the front of the game machine rather than the transparent member and being capable of emitting light in a predetermined manner. The display control means can make the size of a symbol object which is temporarily stop-displayed or stop-displayed at the end of the variable display game different from the size of a symbol object during a specific display period.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 42

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

In the gaming machine, a variable display game is executed when a game ball passes (wins a prize) through a starting area (for example, a starting winning hole). In the variable display game, the variable display of the symbol objects is performed in various modes, and in particular, the high-speed variable display is performed during the process (see Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2003-126438

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to enhance interest in a game by variable display of objects.

According to a representative aspect of the present invention, in a gaming machine comprising display control means for performing a variable display game by variably displaying a symbol object on a display device, a transparent member disposed in front of the gaming machine; and a gaming machine component that is disposed in front of the gaming machine and is capable of emitting light in a predetermined manner, wherein the display control means performs temporary stop display or stop display at the end of the variable display game. It is possible to make the size of the design object different from the size of the design object in the specific display period.

According to one aspect of the present invention, the interest in the game can be enhanced by the variable display of the object.

It is a perspective view of the game machine viewed from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production|presentation control system of a game machine. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first half of the main processing; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second half of the main processing; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of timer interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure game process. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a starting port switch monitoring process; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure starting mouth switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure usual process. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big-hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a variation pattern setting process. 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of 2-byte allocation processing; 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of sorting processing; 9 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a change start information setting process; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal figure usual processing. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of the production control device. 9 is a flowchart showing received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing; 10 is a flowchart showing single-shot command processing; It is a flow chart showing a look-ahead pattern system command process. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing look-ahead variation command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows design system command processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing variable command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of hit system command processing. It is a transition diagram (previous stage) showing a variation mode or a change mode of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a reserved object during high-speed variation display. FIG. 11 is a transition diagram (second stage) showing a variation mode or a change mode of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a reserved object during high-speed variation display; FIG. 10 is a table showing the relationship between the variation mode or change mode of the large symbol object, the small symbol object, and the reserved object during high-speed variation display, and the frame; FIG. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the effect display editing process related to the large symbol object, the small symbol object, the reserved object, and the like. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation|variation mode during the high-speed fluctuation display of a large pattern object (medium pattern). It is a transition diagram (previous stage) showing a variation mode or a change mode (first modification) of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a reserved object during high-speed variation display. It is a transition diagram (second stage) showing a variation mode or a change mode (first modification) of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a reserved object during high-speed variation display. FIG. 10 is a table showing the relationship between the variation mode or variation mode (first modification) of the large symbol object, the small symbol object, and the reserved object during high-speed variation display and the frame; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing how a retained object changes, in which (a) shows a case where the amplitude of fluctuation is large, (b) shows a case where the amplitude of fluctuation is medium, and (c) shows a case where the amplitude of fluctuation is small. It is a transition diagram (previous stage) showing a variation mode or a change mode of the large symbol object, the small symbol object, and the reserved object at the start of the variable display game. FIG. 11 is a transition diagram (second stage) showing a variation mode or a change mode of the large symbol object, the small symbol object, and the reserved object at the start of the variable display game; FIG. 10 is a table showing the relationship between the variation mode or change mode of the large symbol object, the small symbol object, and the reserved object at the start of the variable display game, and the frame. FIG. It is a transition diagram (previous stage) showing the variation mode or change mode of the large symbol object, the small symbol object, and the reserved object at the end of the variable display game (or the freeze effect). It is a transition diagram (second stage) showing a variation mode or a change mode of the large symbol object, the small symbol object, and the reserved object at the end of the variable display game (or the freeze effect). FIG. 10 is a table showing the relationship between the variation mode or the change mode of the large symbol object, the small symbol object, and the reserved object and the frame when the variation display game ends (or freeze effect). It is a transition diagram showing a variation mode or a variation mode (modification) of the large symbol object, the small symbol object, and the reserved object at the end of the variable display game (or the freeze effect). It is a transition diagram (previous stage) showing a variation mode or a change mode (second modification) of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a reserved object during high-speed variation display. It is a transition diagram (second stage) showing a variation mode or a change mode (second modification) of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a reserved object during high-speed variation display. It is a transition diagram (previous stage) showing a variation mode or a change mode (third modified example) of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a reserved object during high-speed variation display. It is a transition diagram (second stage) showing a variation mode or a change mode (third modification) of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a reserved object during high-speed variation display. It is a figure explaining the area|region where the production|presentation button is reflected in a glass frame before and behind the movement of the production|presentation button which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the area|region which a player can visually recognize the virtual image of the production|presentation button reflected in the depths of a glass frame before and behind the movement of the production|presentation button which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram for explaining the flow of light rays from the effect buttons that enter the field of view of the player. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a region in which the effect button is reflected in the glass frame before and after the effect button is moved according to a modification of the second embodiment; FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a region where a player can visually recognize a virtual image of the effect button reflected in the back of the glass frame before and after the effect button is moved according to a modification of the second embodiment; It is a figure explaining the movement aspect of the production|presentation button of the 2nd modification which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the movement aspect of the production|presentation button of the 3rd modification which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining an area in which a production button is reflected in the glass frame and an area in which a player can visually recognize a virtual image of the production button reflected in the back of the glass frame in a fourth modification according to the second embodiment; It is a cross-sectional view of a projecting effect unit of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram for explaining the flow of light rays from the projecting effect unit within the field of view of the player. It is a schematic side view of the game board, etc., according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram for explaining the flow of light rays from the stage portion and the starting winning opening within the field of view of the player. It is an example of a timing chart when the production|presentation control apparatus which concerns on 2nd Embodiment performs the variation display game as an effect|presentation.

[First embodiment]
Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. Note that front, back, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to directions seen by the player during the game.

[General view of game machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The game machine 10 has an opening/closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to an island facility via a hinge so as to be freely opened/closed. The opening/closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (body frame) and a glass frame 15 .

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that makes a game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 visible.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Also, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like arranged on the back side of the game board 30. can be done.

Various frame-constituting members are arranged on the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14 .

Decoration devices 18a and 18b capable of emitting light according to the game state are arranged at the upper center and left side of the glass frame 15. As shown in FIG. The decoration devices 18a and 18b accommodate lighting members such as LEDs therein, and perform light emission effects according to the game state. The illumination members arranged inside these decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Upper speakers 19a are arranged at the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15, respectively. Two lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower part of the game machine 10 separately from the upper speakers 19a. The lower speaker 19 b is arranged at the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12 . These upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a protruding effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and protrudes forward (toward the player) is arranged. The projecting effect unit 13 is a effect device that performs light emitting effects and the like according to the progress of the game. A lighting member arranged inside the projecting effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15 . The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape with an open top. The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied one by one to a ball shooting device (not shown).

The upper tray unit further includes a performance operation device for receiving input operations from the players, a ball lending operation device for receiving input operations from the players, and a decoration device 22 for performing light-emitting performance or the like according to the game state. .

The effect operation device is an operation device in which a touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided at the upper center of the upper tray unit so that the player can easily operate it.

By operating the effect operation device by the player, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in a special figure variation display game (game) or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode), or execute an advance notice effect that gives advance notice of the result of the variable display game (game) corresponding to the starting memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to a special figure variable display game.

Also, the effect pattern may be changed not only during execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device while the game is not being executed.

The game state when the variable display game is executed consists of a plurality of game states. The normal game state (normal state) is a game state in which no special game state occurs. In addition, the special game state is, for example, a state with a high probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) in a time-saving state or a variable display game as a specific game state (variable probability state, probability variable state), a big hit state (special game state ).

Here, the probability variable state (specific game state) continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and There is one that continues until a predetermined probability fall lottery is won (fall lottery type).

Furthermore, whether or not to generate the probability variable state may be always generated when the big hit occurs without determining whether or not to generate the probability variable state by the big hit pattern random number, or a prize winning device having a specific area may be provided and specified. A variable probability state may be generated when a game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated by the player when borrowing game balls, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper tray unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display section 26. - 特許庁A ball lending button 27 is a button operated by a player when borrowing a game ball, and a return button 28 is used when ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. These are buttons operated by the player. The balance display portion 26 is a display area for displaying the balance of a prepaid card or the like.

The decoration device 22 accommodates an illumination member such as an LED inside, and is a device that performs light emission effect or the like according to the game state, and is provided in the front portion of the upper tray unit. The illumination member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Beneath the glass frame 15 including the above-described upper tray unit and the like, and below the front frame 12, there are an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball shooting device (not shown) and a game ball capable of being stored. A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operating handle 24 is arranged in the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the right lower speaker 19b. When the player rotates the operation handle 24 , the ball shooting device shoots game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30 . The shooting speed of the game ball shot from the ball shooting device is set to increase as the amount of rotation of the operating handle 24 increases. That is, the ball shooting device can change the shooting force (speed) of shooting the game ball into the game area in response to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game can be played in various shooting modes with different shooting force. Can shoot balls. The shooting modes include left hitting (normal hitting) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and right hitting in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 32 .

The lower tray 23 is arranged below the upper tray unit with a predetermined gap from the upper tray unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removal hole 23a vertically passing through the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening/closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball removal hole 23a. When the player operates the opening/closing operation portion 23b to open the ball extraction hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower tray 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball extraction hole 23a.

[Game board]
Next, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-like game board main body 30a that serves as an attachment base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 30a. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by shooting game balls from a ball shooting device into a game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 . In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball.

At approximately the center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 is attached to form a window that serves as a display area for the variable display game. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 is arranged as a performance display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of pieces of identification information. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that display contents can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40 . The display device 41 is not limited to having a liquid crystal display, and may have a display such as an EL or a CRT.

A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbols) and characters for producing a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big win display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

The center case 40 also has an inflow port 40a to a warp passage 40e for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage on which game balls that have passed through the warp passage 40e can roll. A portion 40b is provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning port 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball rolling on the stage portion 40b enters the starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. It is easier to win prizes.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided in the upper part and the right part of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d constitute a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

A normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 . Inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed.

A general prize winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40 , and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40 . Winning of game balls into these general winning openings 35 is detected by winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning openings 35. FIG.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, there is provided a start winning opening (first starting winning area) 36 that provides the starting condition of the special figure fluctuation display game, and directly below it is a second starting winning opening (second A normal variable winning device 37 having a starting winning area) is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 is provided with a movable member (movable piece) 37b that converts into a state in which game balls can easily flow in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls down toward the near side. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game balls cannot win the normal variable winning device 37.例文帳に追加When the game ball wins the starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, a special figure variable display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

The movable member 37b is a so-called tongue type normal electric accessory, and rotates via a normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode. , and changes to an open state in which game balls tend to flow into the normal variable winning device 37 (an easy winning state advantageous to the player).

The movable member 37b is controlled by a game control device 100, which will be described later. The game control device 100 shortens the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game or makes the hit probability of the normal pattern fluctuation display game higher than usual, thereby increasing the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state, or normal game state. By making the occurrence time of the easy winning state longer than the easy winning state generated in , a time saving state (general electric support state) is generated as the above-mentioned specific game state. In addition, even in the probability variable state (excluding the latent probability variable state), a time-saving state (general electric support state) occurs in duplicate.

In the game area 32 on the lower right side of the normal variable prize winning device 37, an attacker type opening and closing door that opens the big prize opening by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side falls forward by the big prize opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3) A special variable winnings device 39 having 39c is provided. The special variable winning device 39 converts the state of the large winning opening closed (blocked state unfavorable to the player) to an open state (special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variable display game, thereby winning a large prize. By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the mouth, predetermined game values (prize balls) are awarded to the player. A count switch 39a (large winning opening switch 39a, see FIG. 3) is arranged in the large winning opening as detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening. In addition, a light-emitting member for illuminating the big winning opening is arranged in or near the big winning opening.

A specific area 86 (so-called V winning opening) is provided inside the second special variable winning device 39 . When the game ball enters the specific area 86 (V winning opening), the variable probability state (high probability state, specific game state) after the end of the big hit is determined. The specific area 86 may be opened for a long time only in the case of a variable probability big hit so that the game ball can easily pass through. In addition, the game control device 100 can detect passage of the game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning) through a sensor (specific area switch 72 described later) or the like. While confirming to do, it transmits information (specific area passing command etc.) indicating that there was a V prize to the effect control device 300 described later. Then, the effect control device 300 can notify V winning on the display device 41 or the like.

When the game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) determines the type of the winning winning opening. The number of prize balls corresponding to . In addition, in the game area 32 below the normal variable prize winning device 37, an out port 30b for collecting game balls that do not win a prize such as a prize winning port is provided.

In addition, outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a, a special figure variation display game (a special figure 1 variation display game, a special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 for displaying information such as the current game state.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure variation display unit 51 (special figure 1 indicator, lamp D1) and a second special figure variation for a variation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) Display unit 52 (special figure 2 indicator, lamp D2), variation display unit 53 for normal figure variation display game (normal figure indicator, lamps D10, D18), start (hold) memory number of each variation display game It has a storage display unit for notification (special figure 1 reservation indicator 54, special figure 2 reservation indicator 55, general figure reservation indicator 56). The special figure 1 reservation indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. Special figure 2 reservation indicator 55 is configured by lamps D13 and D14. The general map holding display 56 is configured by lamps D15 and D16.

In addition, the collective display device 50 has a first game state display unit 57 (first game state display, lamp D8), a second game state display unit 58 (second game state display, lamp D9) that lights up when a time saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time saving state, a high probability state of a big hit when the game machine 10 is turned on. 3rd game state display unit 59 (third game state display unit, probability state display unit, lamp D17) for displaying the status, and the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of opening and closing times of the special variable winning device 39) is displayed. A round display portion 60 (lamps D3 to D7) is provided.

In the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display in which the identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit, and may be configured by an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs, and when performing variable display In addition, all LEDs provided as indicators are all lit and all extinguished (simultaneous blinking of all LEDs), cyclic lighting (lighting from any one LED in a predetermined order at predetermined time intervals and extinguishing), or multiple may be performed by lighting and extinguishing (blinking) or cyclic lighting by a predetermined number of LEDs among the LEDs. Also in the normal figure display device 53, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. In addition, the general figure indicator 53 can also be appropriately configured in the same manner as the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52.

In addition, the lamp display device 80 provided at the top of the center case 40 is a lamp display unit (LED) that performs variable display (blinking) that repeats lighting display and extinguishing display as a design (fourth special design), and each special design. It has a lamp display section (LED) for notifying the number of starting (holding) memories of the variable display game. Note that the lamp display device 80 is controlled by an effect control device 300 (described later). The lamp display unit (LED) for notifying the start (reservation) memory number of each special figure fluctuation display game ends the display of the reservation number due to the occurrence of a big hit, but if it is not in the state of a big hit (reach described later on the display device 41 (including cases where is occurring), display the number of pending.

Next, details of the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the normal figure variation display game, and the special figure variation display game will be described.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by shooting game balls toward the game area 32 from a ball shooting device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstructing nails, windmills, etc. arranged at various places in the game area 32, and enters a normal figure start gate 34, a general prize winning opening 35, and a starting winning opening. 36, wins a normal variable winning device 37 or a special variable winning device 39, or flows into an out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32, and is discharged from the game area 32. When game balls enter the general winning port 35, the starting winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 39, the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning port is sent through the payout device. It is discharged to the upper tray 21 .

The normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 . When the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal pattern variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the hit determination random number value extracted at this time.

A state where the normal pattern fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal pattern fluctuation display game has already been played and the normal pattern fluctuation display game has not ended, or the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit. When the variable prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, if the normal pattern start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the memory number is added (+1).

The normal pattern start memory stores a hit judgment random value for determining the hit or miss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, and when this hit judgment random value matches the judgment value, the normal pattern fluctuation display A game wins and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed by the normal pattern display device 53 provided in the collective display device 50 . The normal figure display 53 is composed of an LED that indicates a hit in the case of a lit state as normal identification information (normal figure), and indicates a deviation in the case of an off state. After a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

When the normal pattern random number value extracted when passing the normal pattern starting gate 34 is a winning value, the normal pattern displayed on the normal pattern display device 53 stops in a winning state and becomes a winning state. At this time, by driving the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is converted to an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game balls to the normal variable winning device 37 Winning is allowed.

Winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and winning to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). A game ball that has won a prize in a starting prize winning port 36 is detected as a prize winning ball in a special figure 1 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number, and a game ball that has won a prize in a normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is a special figure 2. It is detected as the starting winning ball of the variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit.

At the time of detection of the starting prize ball of the special figure variation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit pattern random number value, each variation pattern random number value, etc. are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of RAM) of the game control device 100 as special figure start winning memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of 8 times). The number of memories of the special figure start winning memory is displayed on the special figure 1 reservation display 54 and the special figure 2 reservation display 55 for notifying the number of starting prizes of the collective display device 50, and also on the display screen of the display device 41 Is displayed.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game with the special figure 1 indicator 51 based on the winning to the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. Also, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display device 52 based on the winning to the normal variation winning device 37 or the second start memory.

The special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) and special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) are identified by the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 ( It is performed by stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode after variably displaying special symbols, special symbols). Also, in the display device 41, a decorative special figure variation display game is executed in which a plurality of types of identification information (eg, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special figure variation display game.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbols (identification information) composed of the numbers etc. described above are left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol ), the variable display (scroll display) is started in order, and after a predetermined time, the varying symbols are sequentially stopped, and the results of the special figure variation display game are displayed. In addition, the display device 41 performs various presentation displays such as the appearance of characters to enhance interest. Furthermore, in the decorative special symbol variation display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), in the lamp display unit (LED) of the lamp display device 80, the fourth special symbol ( 4th pattern) fluctuates. After a predetermined time from the start, the variable display on the lamp display stops with "lighting" in the case of a loss, and "lighting out" in the case of a big hit.

Conversely, the variable display of the lamp display unit (LED) as the fourth special pattern (fourth pattern) can be configured to stop at "lights off" in the case of a loss and "lights up" in the case of a big hit. . In addition, there is also a configuration in which a plurality of LEDs (fourth pattern LEDs) are provided as each lamp display part, one of the plurality of LEDs is lit in the case of a loss, and all the plurality of LEDs are lit in the case of a big hit. It is possible.

When the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the jackpot random value at the time of winning detection is a jackpot value), the special figure 1 display 51 or special In the display 52 of FIG. 2, a specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the displayed symbols as a result of the special figure variation display game, and a big hit state (special game state) is established. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

At this time, in the special variable prize winning device 39, the special prize winning port solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3) is energized, so that the special prize winning port is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). In other words, the big winning opening provided in the special variable winning device 39 opens wide for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls win, and during this time the player is given the privilege of being able to win a lot of game balls. be.

In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be configured as separate indicators or may be configured as the same indicator, but each special figure variation display game is not executed at the same time. is set to

Regarding the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be executed on separate display devices or separate display areas, or the same display may be performed. You may make it perform by a device or a display area. In this case, the decoration special figure variation display games corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not executed at the same time. In addition, the special figure 2 variation display game is to be executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, and there is a start memory of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, When the execution of the figure fluctuation display game becomes possible, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variation display game.

In addition, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switch 39a uses a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon in which the magnetic field changes when a metal object approaches the coil. . In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the game machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 etc. A microswitch with positive contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. As shown in FIG. The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100 (main board), and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in general, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer). ) 111, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. And so on.

The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and the reference clock for the random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 to enable operation. be done.

The power supply device 400 includes an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as 12V or 5V from a voltage of 32V DC, and a normal power supply unit 410. , It has a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that inform the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery. A control signal generator 430 for generating and outputting control signals such as .

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are subject to replacement when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing it, it is possible to remove it from the object of replacement and to reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. Backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially built-in RAM) of the game control device 100 so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and when it drops below 17 V, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal after a predetermined time. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pushed down and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated. Initialization processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 . A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

Also, the game control device 100 (main board) is provided with a setting key switch 93 . When the setting key switch 93 is turned on by an operator's rotating operation or the like, the probability setting value (setting value) corresponding to the setting regarding the game condition (game) can be changed. The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a set value change switch that can change the probability set value according to the operator's operation. In this embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting the winning probability such as a big hit probability or a small win probability (only when there is a small win), but other game conditions other than the probability (such as production) can also be changed according to the probability setting value. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 constitute setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing settings (probability setting values) relating to game conditions. Instead of the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the set value change switch, or a unique set value change switch may be provided exclusively.

The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are arranged on the game control device 100 inside the game machine 10 so that they cannot be operated (inaccessible positions) unless the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened. be done. That is, general players cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 .

As will be described later, when the game machine 10 is turned on (recovery from power failure, power recovery), the game machine 10 sets the probability setting value according to the ON/OFF states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to shift to various states such as a changeable setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which probability setting values can be confirmed.

In the present embodiment, the probability setting values are defined, for example, in six stages: probability setting value 1 (setting 1), probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), probability setting value 4 (setting 4), probability setting value 5 (setting 5), and probability setting value 6 (setting 6). In general, setting 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player and setting 6 is the most favorable setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting change process, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the working setting value (setting) in the working setting value area changes from setting value 0 (setting 1, probability setting value 1) to Setting value 1 (setting 2, probability setting value 2) → setting value 2 (setting 3, probability setting value 3) → setting value 3 (setting 4, probability setting value 4) → setting value 4 (setting 5, probability setting value 5 ) → setting value 5 (setting 6, probability setting value 6) → setting value 0 (setting 1) → setting value 1 (setting 2) → . Thus, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a set value change switch. For the convenience of explanation, work setting values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to probability setting values 1 to 6, respectively, in the setting change state (setting change mode), but the work setting values and probability setting values are the same. They may be treated as the same by aligning them to a numerical range (ie, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (making the working set value and the probability set value the same numerical value).

Instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value change switch), the setting key switch 93 may be rotated to a predetermined position to change the probability setting value. Moreover, the probability setting value is not limited to six levels. The performance display device 152, which is a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot Dp) display, displays the probability setting values for display corresponding to the selected working setting values 0 to 5, for example. etc.

The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111b non-volatilely stores constant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control. The RAM 111c is used as a work area for the CPU 111a during game control and as a storage area for various signals and random numbers. can be held and stored. An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or RAM 111c.

Further, the ROM 111b stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the game state becomes a game state (special game state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is set, a part of a plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same identification information This state (excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the ready-to-win state.

The ready-to-win state includes a plurality of ready-to-win effects, and the systems (types) of ready-to-win effects with different possibilities (different expectations) of deriving a special result mode (jackpot mode) are normal reach (N reach), Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The degree of expectation (expected value) of the ready-to-win performance is set to increase in the order of no reach<normal reach<special 1 reach<special 2 reach<special 3 reach<premier reach. Also, the ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when the game becomes a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it becomes a loss). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state has occurred is a state with a high possibility of winning a big hit compared to the case in which the ready-to-win state has not occurred.

In addition, the degree of expectation of the production (notice) suggests the probability that the production will be a big hit when the production is selected, the selection rate of the production when it is a big hit, and the production when it is not a big hit (when it is lost). It can be calculated based on the selectivity or the like.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or to generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device, and output the game machine. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining a jackpot pattern, and a small hit pattern for determining a small hit pattern. Pattern random numbers (only if there is a small hit), fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc. for determining the fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (including the execution time of the fluctuation display game in various reach and fluctuation display without reach) A random number generation circuit for generating a random number, and based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, give a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) to the CPU 111a and update timing of the random number generation circuit. It has a clock generator that generates a clock.

In addition, the CPU 111a acquires any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a, the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game (big hit or lose), the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), the number of starting memories Any one variation pattern table is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the above. Here, the CPU 111a serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to produce a prize ball. control to pay out Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit 600, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game control device 100 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a gate switch 34a of the normal figure start gate 34, a start opening 1 in the first start winning opening 36 It is connected to the switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the second start winning port 37 (normal variable winning device), the winning port switch 35a of the general winning port 35, and the large winning port switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39. An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided for inputting a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from a switch and converting it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

Further, the interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72 , the remaining ball outlet switch 73 and the out ball detection switch 74 . The specific area switch 72 detects passage (V winning) of a game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning opening). The remaining ball discharge port switch 73 detects game balls that have passed through the remaining ball discharge port for discharging game balls from the special variable winning device 39 . The out-ball detection switch 74 may detect only game balls passing through the out port 30b, or may detect all game balls that have been shot into the game area and finished playing.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126 and read into the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the prize winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 39a are input to the third input port 124. .

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the second input port 123 .

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the specific area switch 72 , the remaining ball outlet switch 73 , or the out ball detection switch 74 is input to the fourth input port 126 .

Further, the second input port 123 receives the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, and the glass frame opening detection signal provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like. A signal from a switch 63, a front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), etc., and a signal from a vibration sensor 65 that detects vibration of the game machine 10 are input. .

Also, the second input port 123 takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 .

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 through the relay board 70 to a test fire test device (not shown). Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the third input port 124 is read by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124 by the gaming microcomputer 111. be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122, which will be described later.

In addition, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating payout abnormality, a shoot ball cut switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. The first input port 122 takes in the overflow switch signal, the touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, and the signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and supplies them to the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that the lower tray 23 is filled with a predetermined amount or more of game balls (that the tray is full). The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (body frame). This is a signal indicating whether or not

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output section 130 . In addition, by outputting the reset signal RST directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as

Also, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . Note that the reset signal RST is not supplied to each port 122 , 123 , 124 of the input section 120 . The data set to each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be directly supplied to the test-firing test device, are temporarily taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that it is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing apparatus.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. there is A chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to a port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

The output unit 130 also includes a solenoid (universal electric solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 for opening the normal variable winning device 37, a large winning opening solenoid 39b (large winning opening solenoid) for opening the special variable winning device 39, A second output port 134 is provided for outputting opening/closing data for the lever solenoid 86b that operates the lever to open the specific area 86. As shown in FIG.

The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on/off data for the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

The output unit 130 is also provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big win information to the external information terminal 71 . The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game parlor, so that information on the game machine 10 can be sent to an external device. It is ready to be fed to the device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

Further, in the output unit 130, a first driver (driving circuit) receives opening/closing data signals of the general electric solenoid 37c and the big winning opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134 and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and a collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136: A third driver 138c for outputting an ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side, and a fourth driver 138d for outputting to the external information terminal 71 an external information signal to be supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device. is provided.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. Also, the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50 is supplied with DC 12V. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED via a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal via a digit line. A power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, is supplied with DC 12V to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500 . The photocoupler 139 is configured to enable two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. It should be noted that since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using a serial communication terminal of the game microcomputer 111 as in a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 receives serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code, etc.) output from the second output port 134, and outputs a performance display device 152 (status display device). A driver 150 is provided for driving. In this embodiment, the performance display device 152 consists of a plurality (four) of 7-segment type (8-segment type including dots Dp) indicators (LED lamps), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. is not limited to

The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board), but may be provided at another location. For example, the performance display device 152 can display a display probability setting value, a role ratio, a ball output rate, and the number of discharged balls as the performance display.

Here, the number of discharged balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 (also referred to as the number of out balls), and the number of game balls passed through the winning opening (winning number) and the number of games passing through the out opening 30b. It is the sum with the number of balls. The number of ejected balls can be acquired by counting the signal of the out-ball detection switch 74 or the like. In this embodiment, the winning openings include a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), a normal variable winning opening 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and A special variable winning device 39 (big winning opening) is included.

The ball output rate is the ratio (percentage) of the total number of prize balls to the number of discharged balls (or the number of fired balls), and is calculated by (number of acquired balls÷number of discharged balls)×100(%). That is, the ball output rate is the number of winning balls (total number of prize balls) per 100 discharged balls.

For example, the role ratio is the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by entering a prize slot for a predetermined period (for example, from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present). It is the ratio (%) (=so-called continuous role ratio) of the number of prize balls (number of winning balls by role) obtained by winning the big prize mouth. In addition, the role ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big win state and the small win state) obtained by winning the big prize hole out of the total number of prize balls (= big prize hole ratio). , or the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the big winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning opening) (= the so-called role ratio (total role ratio )).

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the production control device 300 (sub board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of the effect control system of the gaming machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) similar to the game microcomputer 111, and a command and data from the main control microcomputer 311 for displaying images on the display device 41. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19 .

The main control microcomputer 311 includes a program ROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and retains memory contents even if power is not supplied during a power failure. An FeRAM 323 capable of performing the operation, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 that constitutes timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 .

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the content of the performance, instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, lights the decoration lamp, and controls the motor. , solenoid drive control, performance time management, etc.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is entered. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to inform the processing status such as the completion of drawing to the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like for the purpose is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311 . The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Via the command I / F331, the decoration special figure pending number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc., transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300, the production control command signal (production command) receive as Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. there is

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18, etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory or the like that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). Note that the board decoration device 46 may include the aforementioned lamp display device 80 .

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes a effect button switch 25a built into the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor inside the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on/off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) that detects the initial position etc. and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the production control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 is provided for detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 .

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the production control device 300 having the configuration described above and the electronic components controlled by it, and drives a motor and a solenoid. DC 32 V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC 12 V for driving motors and LEDs, DC 5 V as power supply voltage for command I/F 331, and DC 15 V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. is configured to

Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC- A DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300 . Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, in the form output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc. signal) to put them in the reset state. A cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the performance control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the performance control device 300 is powered on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number for judging the hit of the normal game based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal game start gate 34, and stores it in the ROM 111b. is compared with the determination value stored in , and the hit/loss of the normal pattern variation display game is determined.

Then, after the identification symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined period of time on the normal pattern display device 53, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is displayed in a stopped manner. If the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the normal pattern display device 53, the general electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is held for a predetermined time (for example, , 0.3 seconds) The opening control is performed as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a loss, the normal pattern display device 53 is controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, the starting winning prize (starting memory) is stored, and based on the starting memory, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game big hit determination The random number for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit or miss of the special figure 1 variable display game.

In addition, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, the start memory is stored, and based on the start memory, the random value for judging the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit or miss of the special figure 2 variation display game.

And CPU111a of the game control apparatus 100 outputs the control signal (production|presentation control command) containing the determination result of a special figure 1 fluctuation display game and a special figure 2 fluctuation display game to the production|presentation control apparatus 300. FIG. Then, after the identification symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, a special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37). form.

Also, the effect control device 300 displays a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100 . Furthermore, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs. In other words, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling effects related to games (such as variable display games).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, and generates a special game state. Let In the processing for generating the special game state, for example, the CPU 111a controls the opening/closing door 39c of the special variable prize winning device 39 by the big prize winning port solenoid 39b to enable the inflow of game balls into the big prize winning port. .

Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses after the opening of the big winning opening. 1 round (R) is to open the big winning opening until the condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) control (cycle game) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times). I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening/closing control means for controlling opening and closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost, the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high-probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (variable probability state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. In addition, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result mode of any special figure variation display game of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game Both are high probability states.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time reduction state, control is performed to put the normal figure fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 in the time reduction operation state, and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 per unit time is higher than when the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. is controlled so that the opening time of the is substantially increased, so it becomes a general electricity support state. In addition, even in the high-probability state (normal probability state) except for the latent probability state, the normal power supply support is performed in a time-saving state.

For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to shorten the time to change the execution time (ordinary figure fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game to a second fluctuation display time shorter than the normal first fluctuation display time (for example , 10000 msec is 1000 msec). In addition, in the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure variation display game (special figure variation time) is also shortened than usual, and the time shortening variation of the special figure variation display game is also performed.

In addition, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal pattern stop time for displaying the results of the normal pattern fluctuation display game to be the second stop time (for example, 704 msec) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). is.

In addition, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation display game results in a win and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (general electric opening time) is the first opening time (for example, 100 msec) in the normal state. It is possible to control the second opening time (for example, 1352 msec) to be longer.

In addition, in the time saving state, the number of openings of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 (the number of openings of the general electric power) is greater than the first number of openings (for example, 2 times) for one hit result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second number of openings to (eg, 4 times). In addition, in the time-saving state, it is possible to make the probability of a winning result in the normal pattern variation display game (normal pattern probability) higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the open state by changing one or more of the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal pattern stop time, the normal pattern open number of times, the normal pattern open time, and the normal pattern probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Thus, in the time-saving state, winning to the normal variable prize winning device 37 becomes easier than in the normal game state, and the number of executions of the special figure variable display game per unit time can be increased more than in the normal game state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-saving states with different things to be changed. Also, it may be set so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal operation state (normal pattern probability is 0). Alternatively, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected when a win is achieved. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Also, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

[Transitional state at power-on]
As described above, it shifts to four states (modes) depending on the ON/OFF states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on.

When the power is turned on, if the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on, the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed is entered. (see A1027-A1036 in FIG. 5B and FIG. 6B).

Next, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off, the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed is entered (Fig. 5B A1031-A1036 and FIG. 6B).

Also, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 93 is off but the RAM initialization switch 112 is on, the state shifts to the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode), and the RAM initialization process (RAM clear mode) occurs. process) is executed to initialize the RAM 111c (see A1042-1044 in FIG. 5B).

If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode) is entered and the power is simply restored.

[Control of game control device]
The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the game microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 9 which is performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main processing will be explained. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing the procedure of main processing by the game control device 100. FIG. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In addition, in the flowchart of the processing executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "A****".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting an interrupt (A1001). Furthermore, a stack pointer setting process is executed to set a stack pointer, which is the top address of the area where the values of registers and the like are saved when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Subsequently, the register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, if the RAM address ranges from 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a signal for prohibiting the firing and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). When at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal for prohibiting the shooting, the shooting permission signal is set to the prohibited state, and the shooting of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is, signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets a power delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value to the power delay timer, subordinate control means (for example, payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) program for performing various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 forming the main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for waiting until the is normally activated. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and waits for the start of the sub-control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It constitutes waiting means for setting a waiting time.

In addition, the power supply delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, there is no need to exclude a part of the RAM area from the calculation, so control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

By reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the standby time starts, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the standby time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the power is turned on. It is necessary to keep operating the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 until the waiting time elapses. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, even without performing such troublesome operations, a situation in which the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 performed when the power is turned on can be prevented. can be prevented.

When the power delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes a process of timing the waiting time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the waiting time (A1008 to A1010).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus, and determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. (A1008). If a power failure occurs (the result of A1008 is "Y"), wait until the game machine is powered off.

The game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by -1 (A1009) when a power failure has not occurred (the result of A1008 is "N"), and determines whether the value of the timer is 0. (A1010). If the timer value is not 0 (the result of A1010 is "N"), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to step A1008.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with troubles at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1010 is "Y"), that is, if the waiting time is over, the game control device 100 can read and write RWM (Read/Write) such as RAM and EEPROM. memory) is permitted (A1011), and off data is output to all output ports (set to a state of no output) (A1012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1013 ).

Further, the driver 150 that drives the performance display device 152 (status display device) may be initialized here. The game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the content of the initial settings to the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits the command to the driver 150 . For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED (each segment) of performance display device 152 . The game control device 100 sets the number of digits to be used for the performance display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of digits used is four.

Next, the game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1014). Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the frequency-divided signal. and a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for triggering random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating abnormality of the RAM (RAM 111c in this case) (A1015). Here, a flag indicating an anomaly is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1016). If it is normal (the result of A1016 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017).

Furthermore, the game control device 100, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (result of A1017 is "Y"), a checksum for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, game control work area) in the RWM Calculation processing is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum at power-off (A1019). If the checksums match (the result of A1019 is "Y"), the RAM is normal, and the RAM abnormality flag indicating RAM abnormality is cleared (A1020). After that, the process proceeds to step A1021.

In addition, the game control device 100, if it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is "N", or the result of A1017 is "N"), if the checksum does not match (the result of A1019 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1021 without clearing the RAM abnormality flag.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (A1021). When both switches are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 shifts to the setting variable state (setting change mode), and executes the process during probability setting change in steps A1027-A1037. .

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality of the RAM (here, the RAM 111c). It is determined whether or not it is set (A1022). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), the process of confirming the probability setting in steps A1031-A1037 (during setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode), steps A1041-1044 RAM initialization processing (RAM clearing processing) or normal power-on (power recovery) processing in steps A1041, A1045, and A1046 is executed.

The game control device 100, when the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1023 is "Y"), the main abnormality that notifies that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board, main board) An error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024). The effect control device 300 that has received the command of the main abnormality error notification notifies that the game control device 100 has an abnormality.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 causes the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 to display the 7-segment display data (error display data of "E1" in FIG. 9C) on the performance display device 152 when the game is stopped. (A1025). Then, ON data of a security signal for notifying the abnormality to an external device (playground internal management device (hall computer), information collection terminal, etc.) is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, even if the information about the big win remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the big win signal are kept off. After that, the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated to wait, and the setting change operation (turning on both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112) is performed again to wait for the power to be turned on. It should be noted that, while waiting to repeat the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 and waiting, the interrupt remains prohibited (A1001), timer interrupt processing that can execute special figure 1, 2 game processing and general figure game processing (FIG. 7) cannot be executed, games (special figure fluctuation display game, normal figure fluctuation display game) cannot be executed.

In this way, it is assumed that there is an abnormality when the probability setting changing flag is set even though the setting change operation (turning on both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112) is not executed. , A1024-A1026. For example, if the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed), the probability setting changing flag may be set even though the setting change operation is not performed. be.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, even when the RAM abnormality flag is set (the result of A1022 is "Y"), the main abnormality error notification to notify that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board) A command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024), and the 7-segment display data (error display data of "E1" in FIG. 9 (C)) at the time of game stop is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 (A1025 ), and outputs ON data of the security signal to the external information terminal 71 in order to inform the external device of the RAM abnormality (A1026). It should be noted that, in the same manner as described above, even if the information about the big win remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the big win signal are kept off. After that, the process of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated to wait.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (during the variable setting state). First, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1027). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (the result of A1027 is "Y"), it is unclear whether the probability setting value is correct, so the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c is cleared. After setting the probability to an initial value (for example, the minimum set value "1") (A1028), a probability setting changing flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed is set (A1029). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1027 is "N"), the probability setting changing flag is set without clearing the probability setting value (A1029). Next, a command during probability setting change is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1030), and the process proceeds to step A1034. In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the command of changing the probability setting notifies the fact that the probability setting is being changed on the display device 41 or the like.

In the game control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), and the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"). ), and if the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1031). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1031 is "Y"), the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, and the probability setting confirming (setting confirming state) process starts. A probability setting confirming flag indicating that the setting is being confirmed is set (A1032). Then, the command during probability setting confirmation is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1033), and the process proceeds to step A1034. In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the fact that the probability setting is being confirmed on the display device 41 or the like.

After step A1030 or step A1033, the game control device 100 executes the processing of steps A1034 to A1040 as common processing during probability setting change and during probability setting confirmation.

The game control device 100 first saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output the security signal during probability setting change and probability setting confirmation (A1034). The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change/confirmation process (FIG. 6B) described later. The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the external information editing process (A1321). The security signal is output for at least 50 ms during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation.

Next, the game control device 100 permits interruption (A1035). As a result, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 7) can be executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036). If the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1036 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1037). If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is "N"), the process returns to step A1036. On the other hand, if a power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is "Y"), the process at the time of power failure of steps A1055 to A1061 is executed.

In this way, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and no power failure has occurred, the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed, or the probability setting value can be confirmed. The setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) is continued.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1036 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prohibits the interruption (A1038), and issues a command for ending notification to the effect control device 300 (effect control board). (A1039). In addition, the effect|presentation control apparatus 300 which received the command of the information completion|finish complete|finishes the information that it is during probability setting confirmation or probability setting change.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set, that is, whether or not the probability setting is being changed (A1040). If the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1040 is "Y"), that is, if the probability setting has been changed so far, RAM initialization processing (described later) of steps A1042 to A1044 is executed. do. On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1040 is "N"), that is, if the probability setting has been confirmed until now, when the power is turned on after step A1045 (when the power is restored) normal processing.

When the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1031 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (A1041). If the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (the result of A1041 is "Y"), the RAM areas other than the probability set value area for storing the probability set values are cleared to 0 (A1042). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0, except for the probability set values stored in the probability set value area. Furthermore, the above-mentioned probability setting changing flag is also cleared here. In addition to the probability setting value area, it is also possible to configure such that the stack area and unused area are not cleared, and the work area and stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) are not cleared. . The performance information is derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning. be.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1043). And, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to production control device 300 (production control board) (A1044), it moves to the processing of step A1047.

On the other hand, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1041 is "N"), the game control device 100 operates normally because both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off. The process at the time of power-on (at the time of power restoration) is started, and the power failure recovery process is executed (A1045). For example, the initial value at the time of restoration from power failure (at the time of power restoration) is saved in the area to be initialized. In addition, the aforementioned probability setting confirmation flag is also cleared here. Next, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special game processing described later is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1046), and step A1047 to process.

In addition, the command for RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044 and the command for power failure recovery transmitted in the process of step A1046 include a model designation command indicating the type of game machine, special figures 1 and 2 pending Decoration special figure 1 reservation number command and decoration special figure 2 reservation number command indicating the number, probability information command indicating the presence or absence of probability state (high probability state or low probability state) and time saving state, special figure fluctuation in predetermined production mode It includes a number-of-effects information command indicating the number of times the display game has been executed, and a power failure recovery command indicating that the power has been turned on.

Furthermore, the command for RAM initialization and the command for power failure recovery include a setting value information command (probability setting value information commands) are included. The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the setting value information command to the production control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the production control device 300 refers to the setting value information stored by itself. You can control the production.

The command for RAM initialization includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The effect control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command displays, for example, a customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41, and informs the RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the LED of the board decoration device 46 and the sound of the speaker. Seconds. Further, the command for restoration from power failure includes a screen designation command for designating the display contents of the screen of the display device 41 . In addition, the command for specifying the screen is a customer waiting demo command during normal processing for both special figures 1 and 2 (when neither fluctuating nor winning), otherwise it is a recovery screen command.

After step A1044 or step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generating circuit is set.

The bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines

In this embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit permutation pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be able to set them arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and corresponding various initial value random numbers Initial value (big hit design initial value random number), initial value of small hit design random number that determines the small hit design (small hit design initial value random number) (only if there is a small hit), hit random number that determines the hit of the general design Initial value (hit initial value random number), initial value of falling lottery random number used in falling lottery (falling lottery initial value random number, etc.) is saved in a predetermined area of RWM as a start value (A1048), and interrupt is permitted (A1049) ). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and destroying the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random numbers, jackpot pattern random numbers, hit random numbers, and falling lottery random numbers are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. there is However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock, and the jackpot pattern random number, winning random number, and falling lottery random number are timer interrupts, which are processing units of the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from the CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) that has the same period as the processing.

In addition, in the jackpot pattern random number, winning pattern random number, and falling lottery random number, the so-called "initial value change method" is used to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. ing. Note that each random number may be updated by a counter with +1 or 1, or may be updated by a random method in which all values within a range appear separately without duplication until one round is completed. In other words, the jackpot random numbers are random numbers updated only by hardware, and the jackpot pattern random numbers, winning random numbers, and falling lottery random numbers are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prohibits interruption (A1051), and executes performance display editing processing for editing performance information and its display (performance display) (A1052). Here, performance information (accessory ratio, payout rate, etc.) may be calculated. Also, when the RAM abnormality flag is set in the register, the work area and stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) may be cleared (if not cleared in step A1042). After that, the interrupt is permitted (A1053). As a result, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 7) can be executed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a power outage has occurred (A1054). If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1054 is "N"), the process returns to step A1050. As a result, the processing of steps A1050 to A1054 is repeated until a power failure occurs.

When a power failure occurs (the result of A1054 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts the process at the time of power failure, temporarily prohibits interrupts (A1055), and outputs off data to all output ports ( 1056). After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1057), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1058). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off is executed (A1059), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1060). Finally, a process of prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1061), and the game machine waits until the power is cut off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. A decision can be made at the time of re-insertion.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 6A is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM top address in a predetermined register (A1302). By switching from the register bank 0 used in the main process to the register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process, it becomes equivalent to saving the registers used in the main process. Note that when the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an input process of taking in inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, reading the state of each input port (A1303). Next, based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag, it is determined whether the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being checked (A1304). If the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (result of A1304 is "Y"), probability setting change/confirmation processing for changing or confirming the probability setting value is executed (A1305).

When the game control device 100 is neither changing the probability setting nor confirming the probability setting (the result of A1304 is "N"), based on the output data set in various processes, the actuator such as the solenoid (for example, the big winning opening solenoid 39b) output processing for driving control of LEDs and LED driving control (light emission control) is executed (A1306). Note that when a firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to a permission state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 (A1307), further random number update process 1 (A1308), random number update Process 2 (A1309) is executed. After that, monitor whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 39a, and monitor errors (front frame and glass frame open) (A1310).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether abnormal ejection of game balls is occurring in the big winning opening (A1311). If the abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1318), which will be described later, it can be determined that abnormal discharge is occurring. If the abnormal discharge is occurring (the result of A1311 is "Y"), the processing from step A1315 onwards is executed.

The game control device 100 executes a special figure game process for performing a process relating to a special figure variation display game when abnormal ejection is not occurring (the result of A1311 is "N") (A1312). Details of the special figure game processing will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes normal pattern game processing for performing processing related to the normal pattern fluctuation display game (A1313). A segment LED editing process is executed to drive the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 to display the special figure variation game and various information related to the game so as to display desired content (A1314).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes magnet fraud monitoring processing for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and determining whether or not there is an abnormality (A1315). Furthermore, the radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) is executed to check the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (A1316).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes vibration fraud monitoring processing for monitoring fraud due to vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1317). Next, an abnormal ejection monitoring process for monitoring abnormal ejection from the big winning opening is executed (A1318). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, abnormal discharge of the special variable prize winning device 39 is performed based on inputs from the special variable prize winning device 39 from the large winning prize opening switch 39a, the specific area switch 72 (V winning prize opening switch), and the remaining ball discharge port switch 73. is monitored, and an abnormal discharge flag is set when abnormal discharge occurs. In addition, the game ball that has passed through the large winning opening switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39 passes through the specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch) or the remaining ball discharge opening switch 73 and is discharged.

Next, the game control device 100 executes external information editing processing for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1319). Then, performance display monitor control processing for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 is executed (A1320). After that, the timer interrupt processing ends.

When the timer interrupt processing returns, the restoration of the interrupt disabled state and the restoration of the register bank designation are automatically performed. Alternatively, a process of returning the designation of the register bank to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability setting change/confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 6B is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing. In the probability setting change/confirm process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability setting value is within the normal range (A2401). The probability setting value here is stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c.

When the probability setting value is within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value (A2402), and the performance display device 152 through the driver 150 (A2404). If the probability setting value is not within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "N"), set the light-off data as the probability setting value display data (A2403), and output it to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2404). ).

Here, the probability setting value display data is data of probability setting values for display displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability setting value display data area. In addition, in order to prevent confusion among hall officials, etc., if the probability setting values are different but the same big hit probability (and small win probability), the display probability setting value is associated with the big win probability (and small win probability). can be the same. That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same big win probability (and small win probability).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the security signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is 128 ms (predetermined time) set in step A1034. Subsequently, ON data of a security signal for informing an external device (amusement center internal management device (hall computer), etc.) of the abnormality is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are kept off.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A2407 is "N"), that is, if the probability setting is being checked, the probability setting changing/confirming process is terminated without doing anything.

The game control device 100 is the first timer interrupt processing after the power is turned on when the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A2407 is "Y"), that is, when the probability setting is being changed. (A2408). If it is the first timer interrupt process after power-on (the result of A2408 is "Y"), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated. This is to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally updated when the RAM initialization switch 112 is kept pressed.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (A2409) when it is not the first timer interrupt process after power-on (result of A2408 is "N"). If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch (the result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated.

The game control device 100, when there is an input of the RAM initialization switch 112 (the result of A2409 is "Y"), the working setting value of the working setting value area (RAM 111c or register) in the range of 0 to 5 Along with updating by +1, the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the probability setting value area are updated by +1 corresponding to the working setting value (A2410). As a result, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by one. After that, the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated. When entering the setting change mode, a value corresponding to the probability setting value read out from the probability setting value area (1 subtracted value) may be stored.

In the above description, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated corresponding to the update of the working setting value. A probability setting value (setting value for work) during setting change is stored in the area, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change work is completed (result of A1036 is "Y"), setting for work is performed. A value corresponding to the working set value in the value field may be stored in the probability set value field for the first time. In this way, when a power failure occurs during the setting change (the result of A1037 is "Y"), the probability setting value used for game control, production control, etc. (probability setting stored in the probability setting value area value) can be prevented from being changed with an unintended value.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (A1312) in the above timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing the procedure of special game processing. In the special figure game processing, monitoring of the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, control of the entire processing relating to the special figure variation display game, and setting of the display of the special figure are performed.

The game control device 100 first executes a starting opening switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in a starting winning opening 36 or a normal variable winning device 37 forming a second starting winning opening, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are extracted, and special figure fluctuation display is performed based on the winning. A game result pre-determination is performed to determine a game result based on a prize winning at a stage before the start of the game. Details of the starting port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a big winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602). In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, detection of game balls by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored. The details of the big winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the special figure game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (subtracts only 1) (A2603). The special figure game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by -1 update. In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). When the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2619.

The game control device 100, when the special game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already timed up, it corresponds to the special game processing number. A special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to processing is set in the register (A2605). Furthermore, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made according to the special game processing number, and game branch processing is executed according to the special game processing number (A2607).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A2607, the game control device 100 monitors the start of variation of the special figure variation display game, sets the variation start of the special figure variation display game, sets the effect, To perform the special figure normal processing to set the information necessary for performing the special figure fluctuation processing (A2608). In addition, the detail of a special figure usual process is later mentioned in FIG.

If the game processing number is "1" at step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, etc. During figure fluctuation processing is executed (A2609). For example, in the special figure fluctuation process, set the necessary information such as a symbol stop command indicating the stop of the special symbol and the stop display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and set the processing number "2" related to the special figure display process Set and save in the special game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "2" in step A2607, if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 sets a fanfare command according to the type of big win, and sets each big win. Fanfare time corresponding to the large winning opening opening pattern, fanfare/interval processing, etc. are executed during special figure display processing for setting information necessary for processing (A2610). For example, in special figure display processing, if the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, necessary information such as a fanfare command and fanfare time is set, and processing number "3" related to fanfare/interval processing is set. and save it in the special game processing number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is not a big hit, the processing number "0" relating to the special figure normal processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "3" at step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the big winning gate, updates the number of openings, and sets the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning gate. A fanfare/during-interval process for setting etc. is executed (A2611). For example, in the fanfare/interval processing, the necessary information such as the round command corresponding to the round of the round game to be executed and the opening time of the big winning opening are set, and the processing number "4" related to the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Set and save in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "4" at step A2607, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting an ending command if it is the final round; A process during the opening of the big winning opening for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing for the big winning opening is executed (A2612). For example, in the large winning opening open process, necessary information such as an interval command and an ending command is set, the processing number "5" relating to the large winning opening remaining ball processing is set, and saved in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "5" at step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening if the big winning round is the final round, A big winning hole remaining ball process for setting information necessary for performing the jackpot end process is executed (A2613). For example, in the process during the opening of the big winning opening, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the special game processing timer area, and the processing number "3" related to the fanfare/interval processing is set in the special game processing number area. Save. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the special game processing timer area, the processing number "6" relating to the jackpot end processing is set, and saved in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "6" at step A2607, the game control device 100 executes jackpot end processing for setting information necessary for executing special figure normal processing (A2614). For example, in the jackpot end process, based on the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop pattern number (jackpot pattern number) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state after the jackpot state and the general electric support state after the jackpot state ( Time saving state) and other necessary information is set, the processing number "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area. The probability fluctuation judgment data includes the probability state (high probability / low probability) after the end of the jackpot state, and the number of continuous games (time reduction fluctuation number, electric support number) in the general electric support state (time saving state) after the jackpot state. ) information is included.

When the processing based on the special figure game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (A2615), then the special figure 1 indicator 51 is executed (A2616). Then, after preparing the special figure 2 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (A2617), the symbol variation control process related to the special figure 2 indicator 52 is executed (A2618).

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start-up switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special game process will be described. FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the starting port switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a winning monitoring table for the starting winning port 36 (starting port 1) (A2701), executes hardware random number acquisition processing (A2702), and determines whether or not there is a winning to the starting winning port 36. (A2703). When there is no winning to the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "N"), the processing after step A2709 is executed. On the other hand, if there is a prize to the start winning port 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether it is during the special figure time saving (during the general electricity support state) (A2704).

When the game control device 100 determines that it is not during the special figure time saving (during the general electricity support state) (the result of A2704 is "N"), it executes the processing after step A2707. On the other hand, if it is during the special figure time saving (during the general electricity support state) (the result of A2704 is "Y"), prepare the right-handed instruction notification command as the production command (A2705), and execute the production command setting process ( A2706). In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. - 特許庁

That is, if it is in the general electricity support state (time saving state), regardless of the probability state (high probability state/low probability state) of the variable display game, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and the production command setting process is executed. . In the case of this embodiment, it is easier to win a prize in the starting prize-winning port 36 with a left-handed hit, and a right-handed hit in the normal variable prize-winning device 37 does not win a prize. Moreover, the game ball does not pass through the normal figure start gate 34 unless it is hit to the right. Therefore, in the general electricity support state (time saving state), right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting, but if there is a prize at the start winning opening 36 during the general electricity support state (that is, during the general electricity support state When hit to the left), a right hitting instruction notification command is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 executes a notification (warning) instructing to hit to the right by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on suspension by the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2708). Then, a winning monitoring table for the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), hardware random number acquisition processing is executed (A2710), and whether or not there is a winning to the second starting winning opening is determined. Judge (A2711). If there is no winning to the second starting winning opening (the result of A2711 is "N"), the starting opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal electric accessory (normal variable prize winning device 37) is in operation when there is a prize to the second start prize winning port (the result of A2711 is "Y"). That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is in an open state in which the game ball can win (A2712). If the normal electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2714.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the normal electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2712 is "N"), determines whether the normal electric fraud is occurring (A2713). When the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that general electrical fraud is occurring. The normal variable winning device 37 cannot win a game ball when it is closed, and can win a game ball only when it is open. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit value) for determination of fraud occurrence, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

The game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on suspension by the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) when the electric fraud is not occurring (the result of A2713 is "N") (A2714). , Executes the special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2715), and ends the starting opening switch monitoring processing. Also, if it is determined at A2713 that the electric power irregularity is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second starting memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
Next, the details of the special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2708, A2715) in the starting opening switch monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing. Special figure starting opening switch common processing, when there is an input of starting opening 1 switch 36a or starting opening 2 switch 37a, is processing that is performed in common for each input.

First, the game control device 100 outputs information about the number of winnings to the monitored starter switch 36a and the starter 2 switch 37a to a management device outside the gaming machine 10. is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (result of A2903 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the starting signal output count area of RWM (A2904), and the process proceeds to step A2905. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (result of A2903 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2905. In this embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting signal output frequency area. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, the game control device 100, of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, whether or not the update target special figure holding number (starting memory number) corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch is less than the upper limit (A2905). If the special figure pending number to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure start opening switch common processing is terminated. Also, if the number of special figures pending to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of special figures pending to be updated (the number of special figures 1 pending or the number of special figures 2 pending) + 1 update Then (A2906), the target starting gate winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 as the RWM jackpot random number. Save in area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding RWM variation pattern random number storage area (A2912), and executes special figure reservation information determination processing (A2913). In the special figure reservation information determination process, the pre-reading stop symbol command corresponding to the stopped symbol information based on the saved jackpot random numbers and jackpot random numbers, and the first half variation number based on the saved variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (pre-reach variation number) And set the look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the second half variation number (number of post-reach variation) as a production command. Then, prepare the decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations as a production command (A2914), execute the production command setting process (A2915), and common the special figure starting opening switch End the process.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning port 36 or the starting winning region of the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variable display game. It constitutes a start memory means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory. In addition, the starting memory means (game control device 100) stores various random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning port (starting winning port 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number. Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Special normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (A2608) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 reservation number (second start memory number) is 0 (A3201). When the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (the result of A3201 is "Y"), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number) is 0 (A3206). Then, if the number of special figures 1 pending is 0 (the result of A3206 is "Y"), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (A3211), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not started (A3211 is "N"), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A3212).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares the customer waiting demo command as an effect command (A3213), performs effect command setting processing (A3214), and shifts to the process of step A3215. On the other hand, in step A3211, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (the result of A3211 is "Y"), set "0" relating to special figure normal processing as the processing number (A3215), special figure game processing number The process number is saved in the area (A3216), and the variable pattern discrimination flag area is cleared (A3217). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3218), and the special figure normal processing is terminated.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is "N"), executes the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202), the decoration special corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number Prepare the figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 2 reservation number command) as an effect command (A3203), and execute the effect command setting process (A3204). Then, the processing shift setting processing during the special figure fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed (A3205), and the special figure usual processing is terminated.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the special figure 1 reserved number is not 0 (the result of A3206 is "N"), executes the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3207), and the decoration special corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number Prepare the figure reservation number command (decorative special figure 1 reservation number command) as an effect command (A3208), and execute the effect command setting process (A3209). Then, the processing transition setting processing during special figure fluctuation of special figure 1 is executed (A3210), and the special figure usual processing is ended.

In this way, by performing the check of the special figure 2 reservation number before the special figure 1 reservation number check, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3202) is executed The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variation display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 1 variation display game. That is, when the second start memory means (game control device 100) has the second start memory, the game control device 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory to the variable display based on the first start memory. It constitutes a priority control means for executing with priority over the game.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3207) in the special figure usual process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

The game control device 100 saves the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (A3401). Subsequently, a jackpot flag 1 setting process for setting deviation information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is a jackpot is executed (A3402). The details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) relating to the special figure 1 variable display game (A3403). In the special figure 1 stop design setting process, the stop design number at the time of loss or at the time of the big hit and the loss stop design pattern or the big hit stop design pattern corresponding to this stop design number are saved. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared as a production command, and production command setting processing is executed. In addition, it acquires and saves round number information (round upper limit value) corresponding to the stop design number and probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop design number.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern (A3404).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3405 ).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern (variation pattern number) which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406). Next, the game control device 100 executes a fluctuation start information setting process for setting the information of the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (A3407), and ends the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In the fluctuation start information setting process, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is performed. Also, in the fluctuation start information setting process, the special figure pending number related to the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the special figure variation display game to be started is updated by -1 (decrease by 1).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) in the special figure usual process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 11 is performed for the second start memory. It is something to do.

The game control device 100 first saves a special figure 2 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) in the variation symbol discrimination area (A3501). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit is executed (A3502).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) relating to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (A3503). Furthermore, the special figure information setting processing which sets the special figure information which is the parameter in order to set fluctuation pattern is executed (A3504). Subsequently, prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set (A3505).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3506). Finally, the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the information of the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3507), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the jackpot flag 1 area (A3601). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1), prepared (A3602), and the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0. (A3603). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here the first among the special figures 1). After that, according to whether or not the prepared big-hit random number coincides with the big-hit judgment value, big-hit determination processing is executed to determine whether or not the game is a big-hit (A3604).

When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3604) is a big hit (the result of A3605 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit flag 1 area where the losing information is saved in step A3601 with the big hit information. Save (A3606) and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is not a big hit (the result of A3605 is "N"), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is either "big hit" or "loss".

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process. This process performs the same process as the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 13 for the second start memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the jackpot flag 2 area (A3701). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1), prepare (A3702), and clear the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number 1 reservation) to 0. (A3703). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 2). After that, according to whether or not the prepared big-hit random number coincides with the big-hit judgment value, big-hit judgment processing is executed to judge whether or not the game is a big-hit (A3704).

When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is a big hit (the result of A3705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A3701 with the big hit information. Save (A3706) and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is not a big hit (the result of A3705 is "N"), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is either "big hit" or "loss".

[Jackpot determination process]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination processing (A3605, A3704) in the jackpot flag 1 setting processing and the jackpot flag 2 setting processing will be described. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. It should be noted that the big hit determination process is a process common to the big hit determination process in other processes performed during the timer interrupt process, and is also performed in step A3004 of the special figure reservation information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value (A3801), and judges whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A3802). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A3802 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a loss (other than a jackpot) as the judgment result (A3807), and ends the jackpot judgment processing. do.

In addition, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A3802 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of the jackpot is in a high probability state (variable probability state). (A3803). Then, if it is in a high probability state (the result of A3803 is "Y"), the upper limit determination value for middle high probability is set (A3804). On the other hand, if it is not in the high probability state (the result of A3803 is "N"), the upper limit determination value for low probability is set (A3805).

After setting the upper limit judgment value of the value of the jackpot random number, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the target jackpot random number value is greater than the upper limit judgment value (A3806). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3806 is "Y"), the judgment result is set to be a failure (other than the jackpot) (A3807). On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3806 is "N"), a big hit is set as the judgment result (A3808). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of special figure information setting processing (A3404, A3504) in special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing are explained. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure information setting process. In this embodiment, the probability state (low probability/high probability, with/without time saving) does not directly affect the distribution of fluctuations, but the production mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. One production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence or absence of the time saving state, the progress of the special figure fluctuation display game, and the like.

The game control device 100 first sets the first half variation group selection pointer table (A4201), and acquires the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4202). Next, set the first half fluctuation group selection offset table (A4203), and acquire the offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) and the stop pattern pattern (A4204) .

Next, the game control device 100 adds the first half variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4205), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the variation distribution information 1 area (A4206). As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the fluctuation distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the presentation mode is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used for selecting a fluctuation group later. However, although it depends on the specifications of the model, when the number of holds is large, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of loss, so in cases other than loss, the number of holds does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation. A variation group includes multiple variation patterns, and when determining a variation pattern, first select a variation group, and then select one variation pattern from this variation group. ing.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the second half variation group selection pointer table (A4207) and acquires the second half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the presentation mode information (A4208). Next, the second half fluctuation group selection offset table is set (A4209), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number and the stop design pattern are acquired (A4210).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the second half variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4211), saves the value obtained by the addition in the variation distribution information 2 area (A4212), and sets the special figure information. End the process. As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area, the fluctuation distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the presentation mode is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing fluctuations in the second half (types of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, only in the case of loss, the rate of reach changes according to the number of holds (the rate of reach is lower when the number of holds is large), so in cases other than losses, the number of holds is distributed in the second half as a result. does not affect

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the variation pattern setting process (A3406, A3506) in the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variation pattern setting process.

The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation form from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half fluctuation pattern is set, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

The game control device 100 first sets the variation group selection address table (A4301), acquires the address of the second half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2, prepares (A4302), and selects the target variation pattern random number The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepared (A4303). In this embodiment, the structure of the second half variation group table is different for winning and losing. Specifically, the size is 1 byte for winning, and 2 bytes for losing. Since the probability of winning is lower than the probability of losing, and even 1 byte is sufficient, the size of the winning is 1 byte from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity. Therefore, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used at the time of winning. In addition, since the probability of losing is higher than the probability of winning, and it is desired to produce more diverse effects, the size for losing is set to 2 bytes.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special figure variation display game is a loss (A4304), and if it is a loss (the result of A4304 is "Y"), performs 2-byte distribution processing (A4305). Then, the process proceeds to step A4307. If it is not lost (the result of A4304 is "N"), sorting processing (A4306) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A4307.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the address of the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the allocation, prepares (A4307), and stores the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (holding (for formula 1) to load the variation pattern random number 2 and prepare (A4308). Then, the allocation process is executed (A4309), the second half variation number obtained as a result of the allocation is acquired, and saved in the second half variation number area (A4310). Through this processing, the second half variation pattern is set.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation group table (A4311), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the variation allocation information 1 and the second half variation number (A4312). Then, the address of the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation pattern selection table) corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (A4313), and the fluctuation pattern random number from the target fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for reserved number 1) 3 is loaded and ready (A4314). After that, sorting processing (A4315) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of sorting is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (A4316), and the variation pattern setting processing ends. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from among a plurality of variations.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte allocation process (A4305) in the variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the procedure of 2-byte allocation processing. The 2-byte allocation process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The game control device 100 first checks whether or not the head data of the selection table (second half variation group table prepared in A4302) is a code without sorting (that is, "0") (A4401). Here, the second half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation selection table, but the latter half defines only the second half fluctuation selection table in which the second half fluctuation pattern is "no reach" Since there is no need for sorting in the variation group table (for example, some variation group tables when the result is a loss), a sorting value of "0", that is, a code indicating no sorting, is defined at the top. .

Then, if the leading data of the selection table (second half variation group table) is a code without sorting (the result of A4402 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result. (A4407) to end the 2-byte allocation process. On the other hand, if the top data of the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is not a code without sorting (the result of A4402 is "N"), one sorting specified first in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) Get the value (A4403).

Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value obtained in step A4403 from the random value prepared in step A4303 (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) (A4404), and the calculated new random value is smaller than "0" (A4405). If the new random number is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "N"), the address of the next distribution value is updated (A4406), and then the process proceeds to step A4403. The following processing is performed. That is, the distribution value specified next in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is acquired (A4403), and then a new random value is obtained by subtracting the distribution value from the random value determined in the previous step A4405. A numerical value is calculated (A4404), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405).

The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"). As a result, any one of the second half fluctuation selection tables is selected from at least one second half fluctuation selection table defined in the selection tables (second half fluctuation group tables). Then, if it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"), the data address corresponding to the sorted result is updated (A4407), and 2 bytes End the sorting process.

[Distribution process]
Next, the details of the sorting process (A4306, A4309, A4315) in the variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the procedure of sorting processing. In the distribution process, based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2, the second half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is selected from the second half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group), or based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3, the first half fluctuation selection table ( It is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

The game control device 100 first selects the target selection table (the second half variation group table prepared in A4302, the second half variation selection table prepared in step A4307, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A4313). is a code for no sorting (that is, "0") (A4501). Here, the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, and the first half variation selection table are predetermined in association with at least one second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number), or first half variation pattern (first half variation number). However, in the case of a selection table that does not require sorting, the sorting value "0", that is, a code indicating no sorting is specified at the head.

Then, the game control device 100, when the top data of the target selection table (the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table) is a code without sorting (the result of A4502 is "Y"), The address of the data corresponding to the sorting result is updated (A4507), and the sorting process ends. On the other hand, if the leading data of the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, or first half fluctuation A first distribution value specified in the group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) is obtained (A4503).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the sorting value obtained in step A4503 from the random numbers prepared in steps A4303, A4308, and A4314 (variation pattern random number 1, variation pattern random number 2, and variation pattern random number 3). Then, a new random number value is calculated (A4504), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). If the new random number is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "N"), the address of the next sorting value is updated (A4506), and then the process proceeds to step A4503. The following processing is performed.

That is, the distribution value specified next in the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (A4503), and then the randomness determined in the previous step A4505 A new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the numerical value (A4504), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"). As a result, at least one second half fluctuation selection table, second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), or first half fluctuation pattern (first half Any one of the second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number), and first half variation pattern (first half variation number) is selected from among the variation numbers).

Then, when the game control device 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"), it updates the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result. (A4507), the sorting process ends.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process (A3407, A3507) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the change start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage area for the target variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (A4601). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (A4602), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (A4603). Furthermore, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (A4604), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is acquired (A4605).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half variable time value and the second half variable time value (A4606), and saves the added value in the special figure game processing timer area (A4607). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (A4608), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared as an effect command (A4609), and effect command setting processing is performed (A4610). ). Next, the special figure reservation number corresponding to the fluctuation pattern discrimination flag is updated by -1 (A4611), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the fluctuation pattern discrimination flag is set (A4612). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4613), the free area after the shift is cleared (A4614), and the fluctuation start information setting process ends.

Information about the start of the special figure variation display game is set by the above processing. That is, the game control device 100 serves as determination means for determining various random numbers stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Also, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information in the start memory.

Then, the information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is later transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 receives the information on the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, and responds to the determined fluctuation pattern. Set the detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information on the stop pattern, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game A variation command containing information about a pattern and a stop information command containing information about extension of stop time are mentioned, and a command is transmitted to production control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command earlier than the variation command, the processing in the production control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[General map game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (A1310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the general-purpose game process. In the general-purpose game processing, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the overall processing related to the general-purpose variation display game is controlled, and the display of the general-purpose pattern is set.

The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a (A7601).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes general electric winning switch monitoring processing for monitoring input from the starting port 2 switch 37a (A7602).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the normal game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (subtracts only 1) (A7603). In addition, the minimum value of the general-purpose game processing timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the normal game processing timer has become 0 (A7604).

The game control device 100, when the value of the normal game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already timed up, the normal game processing number A general-purpose game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number based on the set general-purpose game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the general-purpose game processing number, and game branch processing is executed according to the general-purpose game processing number (A7607).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A7607, the game control device 100 monitors the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, sets the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, sets the effect, Execute normal pattern normal processing to set information necessary for performing processing during normal pattern fluctuation (A7608). The details of the general/universal pattern normal processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 22 .

In addition, if the game processing number is "1" at step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal pattern fluctuation processing for setting information necessary for performing normal pattern display processing ( A7609). For example, in the process during normal map fluctuation, in order to shift to the process during normal map display, set "2" as the game processing number and save it in the normal map game processing number area, Save in the processing timer area.

Further, if the game processing number is "2" at step A7607, if the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is a hit, the game control device 100 Setting of the open time and processing during the normal diagram display, such as setting of information necessary for performing processing during the normal diagram per execution (A7610). For example, in the normal pattern display processing, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a hit, in order to shift to the normal pattern winning process, "3" is set as the game processing number and the normal pattern game processing number area is set. On the other hand, in the case of a failure, in order to shift to the normal game process, the game process number is set to "0" and saved in the normal game process number area.

Further, if the game processing number is "3" at step A7607, the game control device 100 continues the processing during normal game winning, or sets information necessary for performing normal electric remaining ball processing. Processing during drawing is executed (A7611). For example, in the normal per game process, after setting for opening the normal variation winning device 37 for a predetermined number of times, "4" is set as the game process number to shift to the normal electric remaining ball process. Save in normal game processing number area.

In addition, when the game processing number is "4" at step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal electric remaining ball processing for setting information necessary for performing normal per pattern end processing (A7612 ). For example, in the normal electric remaining ball processing, in order to shift to the end processing for the normal game, set "5" as the game processing number and save it in the normal game processing number area, and the normal game ending time Save in the processing timer area.

In addition, when the game processing number is "5" at step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal pattern per end processing for setting information necessary for performing normal pattern normal processing (A7608). (A7613). For example, in the end processing for the general pattern, in order to shift to the normal processing for the general pattern, "0" is set as the game processing number and saved in the general pattern game processing number area.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the normal pattern fluctuation by the normal pattern display device 53 (A7614). After that, a symbol variation control process relating to control of variation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the normal symbol game process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the value of the normal game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A7604 is "N"), that is, when the time is not up, executes the processing after step A7614.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose normal processing (A7608) in the general-purpose processing will be described. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the general/universal figure normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the number of normal pattern reservations is 0 (A7901). When the number of general patterns pending is 0 (the result of A7901 is "Y"), the general pattern normal processing transition setting process 1 is executed (A7923), and the general pattern normal processing is terminated. In the normal game process transition setting process 1, in order to shift to the normal game process, "0" is set as the game process number and saved in the normal game process number area.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the normal pattern reservation number is not 0 (the result of A7901 is "N"), loads the random number per normal pattern from the RWM per normal pattern random number storage area (for the reservation number 1), and loads the RWM. The per pattern random number is loaded from the general pattern per pattern random number storage area (reserved number 1) (A7902). Then, the per-normal pattern random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) and per-normal pattern random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) are cleared to 0 (A7903). In addition, whether the probability of a hit result in the normal pattern fluctuation display game is higher than normal (in a high probability state), that is, whether it is in a short time state (normal support state) (A7904). In addition, the probability per normal pattern in the high probability is 250/251, and the probability per normal pattern in the low probability is 0/251.

When the game control device 100 is not in the normal pattern high probability (the result of A7904 is "N"), it sets the low probability lower limit judgment value (here, 251) which is the lower limit judgment value in the normal pattern low probability (A7905). , If it is in the normal pattern high probability (the result of A7904 is "Y"), set the high probability lower limit judgment value (here 1) which is the lower limit judgment value in the normal pattern high probability (A7906), step A7907 Go to processing.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (here, 251) (A7907). It should be noted that the upper limit judgment value here is common during normal pattern high probability and during normal pattern low probability. If the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "Y"), that is, if the win is lost, the process proceeds to step A7909. If the winning random number is less than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "N"), it is determined whether the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7908).

When the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7908 is "Y"), that is, in the case of losing, the game control device 100 saves the losing information in the winning flag area (A7909). Furthermore, the losing stop pattern number is set as the normal stop symbol number (A7910), the losing pattern information is saved in the normal stop symbol information area (A7911), and the process proceeds to step A7915.

If the winning random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7908 is "N"), that is, if it is a winning, the game control device 100 saves the winning information in the winning flag area (A7912), and loads the loaded winning symbol random number. The corresponding winning stop design number is set (A7913), the winning stop design information corresponding to the winning stop design number is saved in the normal design stop design information area (A7914), and the process proceeds to step A7915. It should be noted that there may be several types of hit stop symbols.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the normal symbol stop symbol area (A7915), and saves the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A7916). Next, the general pattern command corresponding to the information related to the general pattern variation display game (especially the hit/loss information of the general pattern variation display game) is prepared as a production command (A7917), and the production command setting process is executed. (A7918). Then, after shifting the random number storage area per normal pattern (A7919) and clearing the free space after the shift to 0 (A7920), the normal pattern reservation number is updated by -1 (A7921).

That is, with the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation display game related to the oldest normal pattern reservation number 1, the positions of the normal pattern reservation numbers 2 to 4 that are reserved after the normal pattern reservation number 1 are advanced one by one. By this process, the values for the general pattern holding number 2 to the general pattern holding number 4 in the general pattern random number storage area are moved from the general pattern holding number 1 to the general pattern holding number 3 in the general pattern random number storage area. It will be done. Then, the value for the normal pattern reservation number 4 in the normal pattern random number storage area is cleared, and the normal pattern reservation number is decremented by 1.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a process transition setting process during normal pattern fluctuation (A7922), and ends the normal pattern normal process. In the normal pattern fluctuation process transition setting process, in order to shift to the normal pattern fluctuation process, "1" is set as the game processing number and saved in the general pattern game processing number area, and the normal pattern fluctuation time is set. Save in the game processing timer area.

[Control of production control device]
Below, the control (process) which the production|presentation control apparatus 300 performs by the program for production|presentation control is demonstrated.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, the details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the processing executed by the effect control device 300, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "B****".

When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first prohibits an interrupt (B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, B0003), and interrupts are permitted (B0004). When the interruption is permitted, the command reception interruption process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control device 100 can be executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0008). The WDT is activated by the CPU initialization (B0002) described above, and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared after a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the effect control device 300 executes RTC read processing for reading time information from the RTC (real time clock) 338 (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, time information may be read from the RTC 338 at predetermined intervals (for example, every two hours), and it is not necessary to read time information each time the process proceeds to step B0009. When power is turned on to the effect control device 300 (that is, power is turned on to the gaming machine 10), the RTC reading process may be executed only once (by changing the position of the RTC reading process, for example, steps B0003 and B0004 may be executed between). The production control device 300 sets a time timer (timekeeping means) for measuring time in the timer area in the RAM, and reads the time information from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or only once when the power is turned on. When the information is read, the time timer (clocking means) may be adjusted so as to match the time of the RTC 338 . And the production|presentation control apparatus 300 may perform various processes using the timer for time. By doing so, the number of times of processing for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects the operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. A production button input process is executed (B0010). Subsequently, hall/player setting mode processing for receiving operations such as changes in the brightness of LEDs and liquid crystals and volume by the person in charge of the game parlor (game parlor) and players is executed (B0011). In the hole/player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect point control processing for adding and clearing effect points (B0012). In the production point control process, production points are added when the production or operation to which the production points are to be added is executed. For example, information including performance point information is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display a QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall/player setting mode process.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes random number update processing for updating the random number such as the effect random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check processing. (B0014). Details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 executes customer waiting demonstration editing processing for editing and controlling the content of the customer waiting demonstration displayed on the display device 41 (B0015), and changes the power saving state of the gaming machine 10 waiting for customers. The power saving control process to be controlled is executed (B0016).

Next, the production control device 300 updates various data in accordance with the content to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. effect display edit processing is executed (B0017). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem if the drawing data can be completed by the VDP 312 within 1/30 second (approximately 33.3 msec) of the frame period. Then, the drawing preparation for the display frame buffer is completed, and drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0018).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is frame switching timing (B0019). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0019 is "N"), the processing of B0019 is repeated until the frame switching timing comes. Screen drawing is instructed (B0020). Since the frame period of this embodiment is 1/30 second, for example, when periodic V blanking (image update) is performed twice every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period), the frame is switched. . Note that the image may not be updated every 1/60th of a second, and the interval may be increased.

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes sound control processing for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0021).

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes decoration control processing for controlling decoration devices (the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18) made up of LEDs and the like (B0022). In the decoration control process, for example, brightness control (light emission control) of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 executes movable body control processing for controlling the effect device (board effect device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0023). In the movable body control process, for example, a performance for driving a motor is set.

And the production|presentation control apparatus 300 returns to the process of B0008, after finishing the process of above-mentioned B0023. Thereafter, the processing from B0008 to B0023 is repeated.

[Receive command check processing]
Next, details of the received command check process (B0014) in the above-described main process (FIG. 23) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of received commands is 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to be analyzed, so the received command check process is terminated.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, if the command reception number is not 0, that is, if the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the command reception counter of the command reception counter area After subtracting the number of received commands from the value (B1103), the content of the received command buffer in the RAM is copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of received commands is subtracted before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command reading index by +1 (adds only 1) within the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The received command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. Received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31. Here, the received commands are read in order of index and copied to the command area for analysis. At the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the copy of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is "N ”), and the processing from steps B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is received by the performance control device 300, the contents of the received command are stored in the received command buffer and at the same time the command reception counter value of the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received commands are analyzed separately in a command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, it is possible to prepare for receiving a large amount of commands by constantly securing an empty area in the received command buffer without performing direct analysis.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed (the result of B1106 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 loads the received command contents of the command area for analysis (B1107), and analyzes the contents of the received command analysis. Processing is executed (B1108). Details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands loaded in the processing of step B1101 has been completed (B1110). The processing from B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is "Y"), the received command check process is terminated.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, details of the received command analysis processing (B1108) in the received command check processing (FIG. 24) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE section and the lower byte as an ACTION section (ACT section) (B1201). A command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE section (MODE command) and an ACTION section (ACTION command), and is usually continuously transmitted from the MODE section indicating the type of command. be. Therefore, the upper and lower order of the received command are composed of the MODE section and the ACTION section in that order.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section is within the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion indicating the type of command is a value that can be taken (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). Then, if the MODE part is within the normal range (the result of B1202 is "Y"), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the content of the command (specific effect instruction, etc.). Then, if the ACTION part is within the normal range (the result of B1203 is "Y"), it is further determined whether or not the ACTION part for the MODE part is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), the command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE portion is within the range of the variation command (B1205). In addition, the variation system command is a command for commanding a variation pattern of a decorative special design, for example, there is a variation command (A3407). If the MODE part indicates a variable command (the result in B1205 is "Y"), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the variation command (the result of B1205 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE part is within the range of the jackpot command (B1207). The jackpot commands are commands for instructing operations related to the performance during the jackpot (display of a fanfare screen, round screen, etc.). Interval command (A2612) for commanding the interval screen, Ending command (A2612) for commanding the ending screen, and the like. Then, if the MODE part indicates a big win command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), a big win command process is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis process ends.

If the MODE part does not indicate a jackpot command (the result of B1207 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE part is within the range of the symbol command (B1209). The symbol system commands include, for example, decoration special symbol commands (A3403, A3503) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. If the MODE part indicates a symbolic command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), symbolic command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

If the MODE part does not represent a pattern-based command (the result of B1209 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of single-shot commands (B1211). If the MODE part indicates a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), single-shot command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis processing ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent a single-shot system command (the result of B1211 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (B1213). . The look-ahead symbol system command includes, for example, a look-ahead stop symbol command (A2913). Then, when the MODE part indicates a look-ahead symbol system command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), a look-ahead symbol system command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead pattern system command (the result of B1213 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the look-ahead variation system command (B1215 ). A look-ahead variation command includes, for example, a look-ahead variation pattern command (A2913). If the MODE part indicates a prefetch variation command (result of B1215 is "Y"), prefetch variation command processing is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

On the other hand, the production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a prefetch variation command (the result of B1215 is "N"), may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis process is terminated. Also, if the MODE part is out of the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), if the ACTION part is out of the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or if the ACTION part for the MODE part is not a correct combination ( If the result of B1204 is "N"), the received command analysis process ends.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the procedure of single command processing executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). Then, if the MODE part indicates a model specifying command (result of B1301 is "Y"), model setting processing for setting the type of game machine is executed (B1302), and single-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE part represents a RAM initialization command (B1303 ). If the MODE part indicates a command for RAM initialization (result of B1303 is "Y"), RAM initialization setting processing for notifying RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and one-shot command processing is executed. finish.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the command of RAM initialization (the result of B1303 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents a power failure recovery command (B1305 ). Then, if the MODE part indicates a power failure restoration command (the result of B1305 is "Y"), power failure restoration setting processing is executed (B1306), and the one-shot system command processing ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the power failure recovery command (the result of B1305 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents the customer waiting demonstration command (B1307). . If the MODE part indicates a customer waiting demonstration command (the result of B1307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed (B1308), and the one-shot command process ends.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (B1309). And, when the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 reservation information setting process is executed (B1310), and the single-shot system command process is terminated.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the number of decoration special figure 1 reservation command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then whether the MODE part represents the number of decoration special figure 2 reservation command (B1311). And, when the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B1312), and the single-shot system command process is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents the probability information command (B1313). Then, if the MODE part indicates a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot command process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE part represents an error/illegal command ( B1315). Error/illegal commands include, for example, a fraud occurrence command, a fraud cancellation command, a state off command, and a state on command. As a state ON command, a signal is generated from the glass frame open detection switch 63 (glass frame open error) and a signal is generated from the front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch) (body frame open error, front frame There is a command that indicates an open error). A state off command also indicates that no error has occurred.

If the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (the result of B1315 is "Y"), error/illegal setting processing is executed to notify or cancel the notification of an error or illegality (B1316), Ends single-shot command processing.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent an error / illegal command (the result of B1315 is "N"), then the MODE part is a command for effect mode switching (processing during special figure display etc.) is determined (B1317). Then, when the MODE part indicates a command for switching the production mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the production mode switching setting process is executed (B1318), and the one-shot system command process is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is "N"), then whether the MODE part represents the number of out balls command indicating the number of out balls It is determined whether or not (B1319). Then, if the MODE part indicates the number of out-balls command (result of B1319 is "Y"), the number of out-balls reception processing is executed (B1320), and the single-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the number of out balls command (the result of B1319 is "N"), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the MODE part represents the count command (large winning opening count command). (B1321). Then, when the MODE part indicates a command for counting the big winning opening switch (the result of B1321 is "Y"), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the one-shot system command process ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the command of the count (the result of B1321 is "N"), determines whether the MODE part represents the setting value information command (probability setting value information command) (B1323). The set value information command is included in the command for restoration from power failure in step A1046 of FIG. 6B and the command for RAM initialization sent in the process of step A1044. Then, if the MODE part indicates a setting value information command (the result of B1323 is "Y"), the setting value reception processing is executed (B1324), and the one-shot command processing ends. In the setting value reception processing, the setting value (probability setting value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM, and necessary processing is executed.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the setting value information command (the result of B1323 is "N"), determines whether or not the MODE part represents a setting change system command (B1325). As a setting change command, for example, there is a command (A1030) during probability setting change. If the MODE part indicates a setting change command (the result of B1325 is "Y"), the setting change information setting process is executed (B1326), and the one-shot command process ends. In the setting change system information setting process, the contents of the setting change system command are stored, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command indicating that the probability setting is being changed is received, in the setting change related information setting process, a setting change in progress display is displayed on the display device 41 to inform the player that the setting is being changed.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent a command of the setting change system (the result of B1325 is "N"), determines whether the MODE part represents a command of the setting confirmation system (B1327). . As a setting confirmation type command, there is, for example, a probability setting confirming command (A1033). If the MODE part indicates a setting confirmation type command (the result of B1327 is "Y"), setting confirmation type information setting processing is executed (B1328), and the one-shot type command processing ends. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are stored, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the probability setting confirming command is received, in the setting confirmation system information setting process, a setting confirming display is displayed on the display device 41 to notify the player that the setting is being confirmed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion indicates a symbol stop command (B1329). It should be noted that the symbol stop command, for example, there is a special figure 1 symbol stop command (decoration special figure 1 stop command) and a special figure 2 symbol stop command (decoration special figure 2 stop command). Then, if the MODE part represents a command to stop the pattern (the result of B1329 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the command of the MODE part is a normal command ( B1330).

When the command of the MODE section is a normal command (the result of B1330 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), and the game after all symbols have stopped. The state flag is set to the normal state (B1332), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to a normal state, but depending on the timing at which this process is executed, the game state flag may be changed to a "fluctuation", "big hit", or "small hit" flag. is set.

On the other hand, if the MODE part does not represent a symbol stop command (the result of B1329 is "N"), or if the command of the MODE part is not normal (the result of B1330 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the single-shot command processing.

In addition, the effect control device 300 may execute processing for commands not described in FIG. 26 .

[Prefetching pattern command processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 27, the details of the prefetch symbol system command process (B1214) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the look-ahead symbol-based command process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

Production control device 300, first, whether or not the latest pending information is the information of special figure 1 suspension (special figure 1 start memory), for example, the decoration special figure reservation number command received at the latest is the number of decoration special figure 1 reservation It is determined whether or not it is a command (B1601). If the latest pending information is the information of the special figure 1 pending (the result of B1601 is "Y"), the look-ahead pattern system command (look-ahead stop design command) to the special figure 1 look-ahead pattern command area corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations Save (B1602).

Production control device 300, if the latest pending information is not the information of the special figure 1 pending (the result of B1601 is "N"), that is, the decoration special figure pending number command received at the latest is the decorative special figure 2 pending number command In the case, save the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) in the special figure 2 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (B1603).

Effect control device 300, after steps B1602 and B1603, sets a look-ahead variation-based command reception waiting flag indicating that it is waiting for reception of a look-ahead variation-based command (B1604). This is because the look-ahead symbol system command and the look-ahead variation system command are set, and therefore the game control device 100 transmits the look-ahead variation system command following the look-ahead design system command. After that, the look-ahead symbol system command processing is ended.

[Prefetching variation command processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 28, the details of the look-ahead variation-related command processing (B1216) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the procedure of prefetching variation-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is waiting for reception of a look-ahead variation command (look-ahead variation pattern command) (B1701). If the above-mentioned prefetch variation-related command reception waiting flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that reception of a prefetch variation-related command is waiting. If the prefetch variation command is not waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "N"), the prefetch variation command processing is terminated. If the prefetch variation command is waiting for reception (the result in B1701 is "Y"), the prefetch variation command reception wait flag is cleared (B1702).

Next, the effect control device 300 (sub-board) sets the look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of suspensions of the design of the latest suspension information (special figure 1 or special figure 2) (B1703), and of the look-ahead variation system command The MODE portion of the intra-sub prefetch variation command is acquired corresponding to the MODE portion (B1704). Next, a look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and an intra-sub look-ahead variation command ACT portion corresponding to the ACTION portion (ACT portion) of the look-ahead variation command is acquired (B1706).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not both the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, sub-inside look-ahead variation command MODE section and ACT section) are other than 0 (B1707). If the command is normal (effective), it is converted to a value other than 0. If both the MODE part and ACT part after conversion are other than 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted command consisting of the MODE part and ACT part after conversion corresponds to the latest pending information and pending number. Save to the prefetching variation command area (special figure 1 prefetching variation command area or special figure 2 prefetching variation command area) (B1708). Then, prefetch command consistency check processing is executed (B1709), and it is determined whether or not the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal (B1710).

It should be noted that the time of the first half variation corresponding to the MODE part changes depending on the number of suspensions when the variation display game is started. When the pending change display game is started, if there is no other pending, the first half variation is longer, and if there is a new pending and the number of pending is large, the first half is shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half variation changes, the MODE part of the received prefetch variation system command is converted into the sub internal prefetch variation command MODE part so that the internal command of the performance control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Also, since the type of reach is not related to the number of reservations, the second half variation corresponding to the intra-sub prefetch variation command ACT section does not depend on the number of reservations. However, since there are types in the reach of the same system, if the production control device 300 uses it as it is without converting the ACT part (value of the latter half fluctuation) of the look-ahead fluctuation system command, the number will increase and it will be difficult to check. . For example, normal reach also has types such as normal reach minus 1 stop failure and normal reach plus 1 stop failure. Therefore, by converting the ACT portion indicating the reach of the same system to the same intra-sub prefetch variation command ACT portion, the number is reduced and the load of check processing such as prefetch command matching check processing is reduced.

Next, the effect control device 300, if at least one of the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, the sub-inside look-ahead variation command MODE section and ACT section) is 0 (the result of B1707 is "N"), or If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is not normal (the result of B1710 is "N"), it is determined that the command after conversion is abnormal, and the look-ahead variation command processing is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal (the result of B1710 is "Y"), loads the prefetch target pending information (latest pending information) from the prefetching variation command area. (B1711), the prefetch lottery process for the latest pending prefetch effect is executed (B1712). As the look-ahead effect, for example, there are a continuous notice effect (including chance look-ahead effect), a look-ahead zone effect, and a pending change notice. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest hold look-ahead effect (hold change notice, etc.) is generated (B1713). When the latest pending look-ahead effect occurs (the result of B1713 is "Y"), point information corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1714).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the generated look-ahead effect (suspension change notice, etc.) is an effect that starts immediately (B1715). If the look-ahead effect to be generated is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "Y"), the display corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1716). If the generated look-ahead effect does not start immediately (the result of B1715 is "N"), set and save the display corresponding to the look-ahead effect during the hold shift (when the hold display moves, when the hold number decreases) (B1717) ). Then, the read-ahead variation command processing ends.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, if the latest pending prefetch effect does not occur (the result of B1713 is "N"), or if the prefetch effect that occurs is not an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "N"), As it is. Terminates look-ahead variation command processing.

[Processing of pattern-based commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, details of the pattern-based command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 sets the special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of the received pattern system command (decoration special figure 1 command or decoration special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special figure classification is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT part) of the symbol system command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as RAM (B1802). Here, in special figure 1 and special figure 2, since the distribution ratio of the design changes, using the table for each MODE, the design classification is set. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the design type is a lost design, a 4R probability variation jackpot pattern (4R-A1, pattern 1), a 4R normal jackpot pattern (4R-A2, pattern 2), an 8R probability variation jackpot pattern (8R-A1, Corresponds to pattern 3), 8R normal jackpot pattern (8R-A2, pattern 4), 12R variable probability jackpot pattern (12R-A1, pattern 5), 12R normal jackpot pattern (12R-A2, pattern 6).

[Processing of variable commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variable command process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

Effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variation command (variation command) is undecided (B1901). If the special figure type is undetermined (the result of B1901 is "Y"), end the variation system command processing. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), check the combination of the received variation system command and symbol system command (B1902), whether the variation system command and symbol type are inconsistent is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency means a contradiction in effecting, for example, when a winning variation command is received but a jackpot symbol symbol command is received. If the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y"), the variation command processing is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the variation system command and the pattern type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), determines the variation pattern type from the variation system command (variation command) (B1904), and in the effect during variation A variable effect setting process for setting a certain variable effect is executed (B1905). It should be noted that there are multiple effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) is set to be during special figure fluctuation (B1906), and if the number of read-ahead effects such as continuous effects is 0, it is updated by -1 (B1907).

[Variation effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, details of the variable effect setting process (B1905) in the variable command process (FIG. 30) described above will be described. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is reachless variation (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). If the variation pattern type is no reach variation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), the number of points of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, setting information (setting value) corresponding to the first half notice distribution group Set the address table (B2002), acquire the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the variation command (variation command) and the number of reservations of the special figure type (B2003). In the case of non-reach fluctuation, the higher the number of reservations, the shorter the fluctuation time, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of reservations is obtained.

Production control device 300, if the variation pattern type is not a reach-less variation (the result of B2001 is "N"), that is, if there is a reach variation, the number of production points, the model code, the special figure type, the production mode, The first half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and setting information (setting value) is set (B2004), and the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the fluctuation command (variation command) and the fluctuation pattern type is set. An address is acquired (B2005).

Effect control device 300, after steps B2003 and B2005, performs a lottery for notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before reach) (B2006). Subsequently, the number of production points, the model code, the special type, the production mode, the pattern type, and the setting information (setting value) are set (B2007), and the ACT of the variation system command is set. The address of the second half advance notice distribution group table corresponding to the part is obtained (B2008), and a lottery for the advance notice that appears during the second half fluctuation (during reach) is performed (B2009). After that, the content of the variation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the variation command (variation command) is determined (B2010). In addition, you can see the fluctuation time and main reach contents from the fluctuation system command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the notice (B2011). After that, the stop pattern of the decorative special figure variable display game is determined according to the content of the variable performance such as the reach performance and the notice performance (B2012). Here, the decoration stop pattern is specifically determined, such as determining a loose pattern in the case of a missing pattern.

Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of variable effect (B2013), and performs display setting of notice effect (B2014). Subsequently, the display setting of the pending reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed, and for example, the display that the pending display corresponding to the decoration special figure that fluctuates this time is set is set (B2015). Subsequently, a sound number that determines the mode of presentation (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the mode of presentation by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2016). The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting units (decoration LEDs, etc.), and emits light in a light emission mode (color of each LED, light emission timing, etc.) determined by the decoration number. .

Note that it is also possible to set the voice number and decoration number based on setting information (setting values) as well as the effect content. In this way, the player can enjoy guessing the setting information (set value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emission mode of the decoration device, that is, the light emission mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED).

Next, the effect control device 300 performs the display setting of the decorative special figure fluctuation corresponding to the special figure type (B2017), and the fourth special figure in addition to the above-mentioned first to third special symbols that fluctuate on the display device 41 The display setting of the 4th symbol variation related to (4th symbol, identification information) is performed (B2018). The fourth symbol variation may be displayed by the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) of the lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the display device 41, or may be executed on the display screen of the display device 41. good too.

[Processing of winning commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the details of the winning command processing (B1208) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the winning system command processing executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE part of the received hit system command indicates fanfare (B2101). If the MODE part of the win-related command indicates fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, if the win-related command is a big win fanfare command (or a small win fanfare command if there is a small win), fanfare effect is set. A fanfare effect setting process is executed (B2102). The fanfare command includes information on the upper limit of the number of rounds for this big hit. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 is set to fanfare in progress (B2103), and the win system command processing is terminated. In addition, the round number upper limit value can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol system command (decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

If the MODE part of the received hit-related command does not represent fanfare (the result of B2101 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the hit-related command represents a round ( B2104). If the MODE part represents a round (the result of B2104 is "Y"), that is, if the hit system command is a round command (or if there is a small hit, the open command during the small hit), the effect control device 300 performs a round effect. Setting processing is executed, the game state flag indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 is set to in-round (B2105, B2106), and the win-related command processing is terminated.

When the MODE part of the received hit-related command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the hit-related command represents an interval ( B2107). When the MODE part represents an interval (the result of B2107 is "Y"), that is, when the winning system command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process, and the current game of the gaming machine 10 The game state flag indicating the state (P machine state) is set to be in an interval (B2108, B2109), and the win system command processing is terminated. (In addition, when there is a small win and the big winning opening is opened only once with the small win, that is, when the small win is one round, there is no interval command.)

If the MODE part of the received hit-related command does not represent an interval (the result of B2107 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the hit-related command represents the ending ( B2110). If the MODE part represents the ending (the result of B2110 is "Y"), that is, if the hit system command is the ending command (or if there is a small hit, a small win end screen command), the effect control device 300 performs the ending effect , sets the game state flag indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 to "ending" (B2111, B2112), and ends the winning command process. .

It should be noted that, if the MODE part of the received hit system command does not represent the ending (the result of B2110 is "N"), the effect control device 300 does not execute any processing and ends the hit system command process. do.

[Variation mode or change mode of large pattern object, small pattern object, and reserved object]
FIG. 33 is a screen transition diagram (previous stage) showing how the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small pattern object 615, and the reserved objects 633, 633a are being changed and displayed on the display device 41 at high speed. FIG. 34 is a screen transition diagram (second stage) showing how the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small pattern object 615, and the pending objects 633, 633a are being changed and displayed on the display device 41 at high speed. FIG. 35 is a table showing the relationship between the frame and the variation mode or change mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 15, and the reserved objects 633, 633a during high-speed variation display.

As shown in FIG. 33 (for example (a1)), a variable display area 610 is arranged in the central part of the display device 41, and a large pattern object 610A (first large pattern object) is arranged on the left side of the variable display area 610. A large symbol object 610B (first large symbol object) is arranged on the right side of the variable display area 610, and a large symbol object 610C (second large symbol object) is arranged in the center of the variable display area 610. In (a1) of FIG. 33, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C all display "7" as identification information, but each can display arbitrary identification information (an integer from 1 to 9). . Also, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C are configured such that identification information (for example, "7") is written on the front or back surface of a rectangular plate-shaped main body, but the identification information (for example, " 7") only.

In addition, at the lower part of the display device 41 and directly below the large symbol object 610C, a reserved digestion area 640 is arranged, and a reserved display portion 630a (special figure 1 reserved display portion) is arranged on the left side thereof. . In addition, the right side of the reserved digestion area 640 is a special figure 2 reserved display portion. In the special figure 1 reserved display portion (reserved display portion 630a) and the special figure 2 reserved display portion, the reserved objects 633 before digestion are arranged in a row according to the number of reservations (up to 4 pieces), respectively. Area 640 displays pending objects 633a that are being digested. Suspended object 633a is a suspended display corresponding to the starting memory (suspended during variation) of the special figure variation display game being executed. In addition, the special figure 1 pending display unit displays the pending object 633 (holding display) corresponding to the first start memory (special figure 1 pending, special figure 1 starting memory), and the special figure 2 pending display unit is the second Display the pending object 633 (holding display) corresponding to the starting memory (special figure 2 reservation, special figure 2 starting memory).

On the upper right of the display device 41 (on the right side of the large symbol object 610B), a special figure 1 reserved number display unit 650 and a special figure 2 reserved number display unit 660 are arranged in order from the top. In the special figure 1 reserved number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display unit 660, the number "2" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number and the number "0" indicating the special figure 2 reserved number are displayed respectively. . Therefore, two reserved objects 633 are displayed in the special figure 1 reserved display portion (reserved display portion 630a), and the reserved object 633 is not displayed in the special figure 2 reserved display portion.

In addition, a small pattern object 615 is arranged at the lower right of the display device 41 (right side of the special figure 2 reserved display portion). The small pattern object 615 displays, for example, identification information consisting of Chinese numerals "one" to "nine", and although only one is displayed in FIG. 615 may be displayed.

As noted above, pending digestion area 640 displays pending object 633a. Therefore, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 execute the variable display game accompanying the digestion of the reserved object 633a (starting memory).

In the variable display game (decorative special symbol variable display game) on the display device 41, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C and the small symbol object 615 are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the suspended objects 633 and 633a can be variably displayed in such a manner that the displayed form (shape, pattern, etc.) changes with time regardless of the execution of the variable display game, but they are variably displayed only during the variable display game. You may do so.

The large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C are variably displayed in the order of preparatory movement, low speed variation, medium speed variation, high speed variation, medium speed variation, low speed variation, and temporary stop variation in the variation display game. Further, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B and the large pattern object 610C are different in variation mode (variation display mode).

During the variable display game, the small symbol object 615 is synchronized with the update period (for example, 1/30 second, 33.3 ms) of the screen (frame) of the display device 41 (or synchronized with a cycle that is an integral multiple of the update period). The identification information from "one" to "nine" is sequentially switched.

The retained objects 633 and 633a are variably displayed (variably displayed) in such a manner that their shapes vibrate at a predetermined cycle.

In this embodiment, the effect control device 300 (display control means) moves the large symbol objects 610A and 610B from the upper end (base end) of the specific route (here, a straight line route along the vertical direction) to the lower end (terminal end) of the specific route. After moving toward and disappearing, the large pattern objects 610A and 610B whose identification information (first identification information) has been switched are moved from the upper end (base end) toward the lower end (terminating end) to disappear. The large pattern objects 610A and 610B are vertically scrolled (scrolled) in a repetitive manner. As the specific route, not only a straight route extending in the vertical direction but also various routes such as a straight route inclined in a predetermined direction, a curved route in an arc shape, and the like can be applied.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 (display control means) displays the large symbol object 610C in a manner in which the axis is rotated in stages, and the front side or the back side on which the identification information (second identification information) is displayed is The large pattern object 610C is variably displayed so that it is alternately viewed from the front, and the identification information (second identification information) is switched each time the front side and/or the back side is viewed from the front.

The large pattern object 610C has, for example, a display mode that rotates in the axial direction so that the front side and the back side on which the identification information is displayed alternately appear at a predetermined position (center of the screen), and the front side or the back side is viewed from the front. Variation display is performed by rotational variation at which the identification information is switched (see FIG. 37(a)). The large pattern object 610C rotates in such a manner that the left portion of the rotation axis moves to the back side of the paper surface and the right portion moves to the front side of the paper surface, but it may be rotated in the opposite direction.

In low-speed fluctuation, medium-speed fluctuation, and high-speed fluctuation, the large pattern objects 610A and 610B are variably displayed by vertical scrolling, and the large pattern object 610C is variably displayed by rotation variation. The speed increases in the order of low-speed fluctuation, medium-speed fluctuation, and high-speed fluctuation. It should be noted that the variation speed of the small pattern object 615 is constant in low-speed variation, medium-speed variation, and high-speed variation.

Note that the preliminary operation is a display in which the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C are moved by a predetermined distance in the direction opposite to the vertical scroll direction before the low speed fluctuation is started. Temporary stop fluctuation is a fluctuation display immediately before the end of the fluctuation display game, and is a fluctuation display in which the display positions of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C oscillate in the vertical direction at a predetermined cycle.

[High-speed fluctuation display]
A variation mode (variation display mode) during high-speed variation display will be described. Here, variable display such as high-speed variable display is displayed by sequentially updating frames (screens). 33 and 34, for example, the case where the 101st (arbitrary number) to 125th (arbitrary number) frames are used will be described.

In the frame 101 shown in (a1) of FIG. 33, the large pattern object 610A is displayed on the upper left side of the display device 41, and the large pattern object 610B is displayed on the upper right side of the display device 41, each displaying the identification information "7". ing. The large pattern object 610C is displayed in the central portion of the display device 41 with the identification information "7" viewed from the front. Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "seven", and the reserved objects 633 and 633a are displayed in the most inflated form (shape "large") (Fig. 41).

In the frame 102 (the frame next to the frame 101) shown in (a2) of FIG. 33, the large pattern object 610A is displayed on the left side of the display device 41 and at the center in the height direction, and the large pattern object 610B , are displayed on the right side of the display device 41 and at the center in the height direction, and each display the identification information "7", but they do not move in the horizontal direction compared to the frame 101 (hereinafter referred to as as well).

The large pattern object 610C is displayed at a predetermined position (center of the screen) in a state in which the entire object is rotated 60 degrees in the axial direction from a posture in which the identification information "7" is viewed from the front. It shows the figure as seen. The direction of rotation of the shaft is such that the left side of the rotation axis moves to the back and the right side moves to the front, but it may rotate in the opposite direction. Also, the large pattern object 610C has not moved in the horizontal and vertical directions compared to the frame 101 (and so on). The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "8", and the reserved objects 633 and 633a also maintain the form (shape "large").

In the frame 103 (the next frame after the frame 102) shown in (a3) of FIG. 33, the large pattern object 610A is displayed on the lower left side of the display device 41, and the large pattern object 610B is displayed on the lower right side of the display device 41. Each of them displays the identification information "7". The large pattern object 610C is displayed in a state in which the entire object is rotated by 120 degrees from a posture in which the identification information "7" is viewed from the front.

Here, the large pattern object 610C can be made transparent except for the identification information. A graphic is displayed (FIG. 35). Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "9", and the reserved objects 633 and 633a also maintain the form (shape "large"). Although part of the large pattern object 610A is displayed hidden by the reserved object 633, conversely, part (or all) of the reserved object 633 is displayed in a manner hidden by the large pattern object 610A. (same hereafter).

In frame 104 (the next frame after frame 103) shown in (a4) of FIG. is displayed, and a large pattern object 610B displaying identification information "8" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display device 41. FIG. The large pattern object 610C is displayed in a state in which the entire object is rotated 180 degrees from a posture in which the identification information "7" is viewed from the front, and the back side is viewed from the front, and the identification information "8" is displayed on the back side. there is Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "one", and the reserved objects 633 and 633a also maintain the form (shape "large").

In the frame 105 (the next frame after the frame 104) shown in (a5) of FIG. 33, the large pattern object 610A is displayed on the left side of the display device 41 and at the center in the height direction, and the large pattern object 610B is displayed. are displayed on the right side of the display device 41 and at the center in the height direction, and each display the identification information "8". The large pattern object 610C is displayed in a form in which the entire object is rotated 60 degrees from a posture in which the identification information "8" is viewed from the front, and a figure in which the identification information "8" is viewed obliquely is displayed. . The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "2", and the reserved objects 633 and 633a also maintain the form (shape "large").

In the frame 106 (the next frame after the frame 105) shown in (a6) of FIG. 33, the large pattern object 610A is displayed on the lower left side of the display device 41, and the large pattern object 610B is displayed on the lower right side of the display device 41. Each of them displays the identification information "8". The large pattern object 610C is displayed in a state in which the entire object is rotated 120 degrees from a posture in which the identification information "8" is viewed from the front, and the outer shape of the identification information "8" is horizontally reversed and viewed obliquely. A figure is displayed. Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "three", and the reserved objects 633 and 633a also maintain the form (shape "large").

In frame 107 (the next frame after frame 106) shown in (a7) of FIG. is displayed, and a large pattern object 610B displaying identification information "9" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display device 41. FIG. The large pattern object 610C is displayed in a state in which the entire object is rotated 180 degrees from a posture in which the identification information "8" is viewed from the front, and the surface is viewed from the front, and the identification information "9" is displayed on the surface. there is Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "four". The retained objects 633 and 633a are switched from the most inflated form (shape "large") to a form contracted by one step (shape "medium") (FIG. 41).

In the frame 108 (the frame next to the frame 107) shown in (a8) of FIG. 33, the large pattern object 610A is displayed on the left side of the display device 41 at the center in the height direction, and the large pattern object 610B is displayed on the left side of the display device 41. They are displayed on the right side of the display device 41 and at the center in the height direction, and each display the identification information "9". The large pattern object 610C is displayed in a state in which the entire object is rotated 60 degrees from a posture in which the identification information "9" is viewed from the front, and a figure is displayed in a state in which the identification information "9" is viewed obliquely. . Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "five", and the reserved objects 633 and 633a also maintain the form (shape "medium").

In frame 113 (the frame after frame 108 by five frames) shown in (a9) of FIG. A large pattern object 610B displaying identification information "2" is displayed at the top. The large pattern object 610C is displayed with its surface viewed from the front, and the identification information "2" is displayed on the surface. Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "one". The reserved objects 633 and 633a are switched from the one-step contracted form (shape "medium") to the two-step contracted form (shape "small") (FIG. 41).

In frame 119 (a frame six frames after frame 113) shown in (a10) of FIG. A large pattern object 610B displaying identification information "4" is displayed at the top. The large pattern object 610C is displayed with its surface viewed from the front, and the identification information "4" is displayed on the surface. Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "seven". Reserved objects 633 and 633a are switched from shape "small" to shape "medium" (FIG. 41).

In frame 125 shown in (a11) of FIG. 34 (the frame after frame 119 by six frames), a large pattern object 610A displaying identification information "6" is displayed on the upper left side of display device 41, and the right side of display device 41 is displayed. A large pattern object 610B displaying identification information "6" is displayed at the top. The large pattern object 610C is displayed with its surface viewed from the front, and the identification information "6" is displayed on the surface. Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "four". Reserved objects 633 and 633a are switched from shape "medium" to shape "large" (FIG. 41).

As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the large pattern objects 610A and 610B move in the order of the top, center and bottom of the display device 41 while having the same identification information (same form) using three frames. is displayed. Further, in the large pattern object 610C, the same identification information (identification information to be viewed from the front) is displayed only in one frame. Further, the retained objects 633 and 633a change their shape every 6 frames, and return to their original shape at frame 125. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 35, the large pattern object 610A (FIG. 35: left pattern) and the large pattern object 610B (FIG. 35: right pattern) maintain the same identification information in three frames, and the identification information is displayed so that is switched. Therefore, the switching period P1 of the large pattern objects 610A and 610B and the display period T1 of the large pattern objects 610A and 610B having the same form are the same, and are three frames (100 ms).

The identification information of the large pattern object 610C (FIG. 35: medium pattern) is switched every three frames, but the display period T2 of the same identification information (identification information viewed from the front) is one frame (33.3 ms). .

Therefore, the switching period P1 of the large pattern object 610C is 3 frames (100 ms), but the display period T2 of the large pattern object 610C having the same shape is 1 frame (33.3 ms).

Since the identification information of the small pattern object 615 is switched each time one frame is switched, the switching period P2 of the small pattern object 615 and the display period S1 of the small pattern object 615 of the same form are the same and one frame (33.3 ms). Become.

The retained objects 633 and 633a are displayed continuously for 6 frames in a shape of "large", a shape of "medium", and a shape of "small". ”, shape “medium”, and shape “large”, and this is repeated periodically. Therefore, the shaking period P3 (period of shape change) of the retained objects 633 and 633a is 24 frames (800 ms), and the display period H1 of the retained objects 633 and 633a having the same shape is 6 frames (200 ms).

In this embodiment, regarding the display period (continuous display period) of each object of the same form, the display period S1 of the small symbol object 615 = the display period T2 (one frame) of the large symbol object 610C <the display period of the large symbol objects 610A and 610B Display period T1 (3 frames)<Display period H1 (6 frames) of reserved objects 633 and 633a.

Here, since the large pattern objects 610A and 610B are vertically scrolled and have a large amount of movement, it is easy to recognize that they are fluctuating. Also, since the large pattern objects 610A and 610B having the same identification information are vertically scrolled without changing their forms, it is possible to recognize that they are the same even if the amount of movement is large. Therefore, even if the large pattern objects 610A and 610B are translucent, it is possible to easily recognize that the variable display is being performed by vertical scrolling.

On the other hand, the large pattern object 610C has a small amount of movement (zero) due to rotation fluctuation. However, the switching cycle P1 for switching the identification information is the same for the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C. The period (one frame) during which the same identification information is displayed in the large symbol object 610C is made shorter than the period (three frames) during which the same identification information is displayed in the large symbol objects 610A and 610B. Furthermore, in a frame in which the large pattern object 610C does not display the identification information when viewed from the front, the large pattern object 610C having a different shape from the large pattern object 610C in which the identification information is displayed (even if a figure imitating the identification information is displayed, may not be displayed) is displayed to make it appear that the shape of the large pattern object 610C changes periodically. Therefore, even if the large pattern object 610C is semi-transparent, it is possible to easily recognize that the variable display is being performed by the rotation variation.

In addition, the display period H1 (for 6 frames) of the reserved objects 633 and 633a is made longer than the display period T1 (for 3 frames) of the large pattern objects 610A and 610B and the display period T2 (for 1 frame) of the large pattern object 610C. ing. As a result, the player naturally directs his/her line of sight to the fast moving direction, so that the player's line of sight can be directed to the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C during high-speed fluctuations. Also, when the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C are stopped (including the temporarily stopped state), the line of sight can be directed to the variably displayed holding objects 633, 633a.

As described above, the shaking period P3 (the period at which the shape changes) of the retained objects 633 and 633a is 24 frames (800 ms), which is longer than the game ball shooting period (600 ms) from the ball shooting device. ing. Here, the game ball is shot by the ball shooting device, and the player feels it through the sound and vibration generated at that time. Therefore, by making the shaking period P3 (800 ms) of the suspended objects 633 and 633a slower than the firing period (600 ms), the player can relax and enjoy the game.

By the way, in the lamp display device 80, one of the two lamp display units (LED) at the bottom reports as the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 variation display game, and the other LED is the special figure 2 variation display game. It is reported as the fourth pattern. The two LEDs are controlled by the production control device 300, and when performing the special figure 1 variation display game, one LED blinks at intervals of 100 ms (100 ms on, 100 ms off: cycle 200 ms), and the special figure 2 variation display game Also when it is performed, the other LED is blinked at intervals of 100 ms. In addition, in the lamp display device 80, the upper left two LEDs (decorative special figure 1 reserved LED 1, decorative special figure 1 reserved LED 2) are turned off, lit, blinking depending on the number of decorative special figures 1 reserved (first start number of memories), and the upper right two LEDs (decorative special figure 2 reserved LED 1, decorative special figure 2 reserved LED 2) display the number of decorative special figures 2 reserved (second start memory number). The LED blinking interval for these holds (number of holds) is also 100 ms (100 ms on, 100 ms off: cycle 200 ms). Therefore, it is also preferable to set the oscillation period P3 of the suspended objects 633 and 633a to a period corresponding to three frames (100 ms) or an integral multiple thereof. Thereby, the vibration of the reserved objects 633 and 633a and the flashing of the fourth symbol can be associated with each other.

Further, as described above, in the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 reservation indicator 54 is composed of the lamps D11 and D12, and the special figure 2 reservation indicator 55 is composed of the lamps D13 and D14.

When the number of reservations is 1, the lamp D11 or the lamp D12 lights up, the lamp D11 and the lamp D12 light up when the number of reservations is 2, and the lamp D11 or the lamp D11 when the number of reservations is 3. The lamp D12 blinks and the remaining lamps light up, and when the number of reservations is 4, the lamps D11 and D12 blink.

Similarly, when the number of reservations is 1, the lamp D13 or the lamp D14 lights up, and when the number of reservations is 2, the lamps D13 and D14 light up, and when the number of reservations is 3 The lamp D13 or the lamp D14 blinks and the remaining lamps light up, and when the number of reservations is 4, the lamps D13 and D14 blink.

The game control device 100 controls the special figure 1 suspension indicator 54 and the special figure 2 suspension indicator 55, but the lamps D11-D14 are blinking at intervals of 128 ms (128 ms on, 128 ms off: cycle 256 ms). . Therefore, it is also preferable to set the shaking period P3 of the holding objects 633 and 633a to a period close to the blinking interval of 128 ms for the lamps D11 to D14, for example, a period of four frames (133 ms) or an integral multiple of this period. Thereby, the vibration of the holding objects 633 and 633a and the blinking of the lamps D11-D14 can be associated with each other.

[Effect display editing process]
FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the procedure of effect display editing processing relating to large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, small symbol object 615, reserved objects 633, 633a, and the like. Effect control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311, VDP 312), in the main process (FIG. 23), the image data including large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, small symbol object 615, and reserved objects 633, 633a are processed into one frame. (B0017) and displayed on the display device 41 (B0020). As a result, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the reserved objects 633, 633a can be variably displayed (displayed as moving images) in units of one frame (33.3 ms units) in the variable display game.

At step B2501, the effect control device 300 generates a symbol layer. Here, the effect control device 300 allocates the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C and the small symbol object 615 to the symbol layer in order of use (see FIGS. 35, 40, 44 and 47) for each frame. The large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C and the small pattern object 615 can be selected independently, and a pattern layer is created by overlapping these as layers. Each layer has common plane coordinates for display on the display device 41, and includes information on the form of each object (including identification information) and information on the position of each object on the plane coordinates (displacement from the origin of the plane coordinates). information).

At step B2502, the effect control device 300 generates an information display layer. In the information display layer, reserved objects 633 and 633a are allocated to the information display layer in the order of use (see FIGS. 35, 40, 44, and 47) for each frame, and special figure 1 reserved number display section 650, special figure 2 Reserved number display portion 660, right-handed display, left-handed display, and other information desired to be recognized by the player are also allocated as appropriate. Note that the right-handed display and left-handed display suggest the shooting mode (right-handed or left-handed) to the player.

At step B2503, the effect control device 300 generates a background layer. The background layer is a layer in which a background displayed on the entire screen of the display device 41 is drawn.

In addition, at step B2504, the effect control device 300 generates a effect frame layer in which a predetermined effect image (effect image, etc.) is drawn.

At step B2505, the effect control device 300 generates image data by superimposing, for example, the background layer, the pattern layer, the information display layer, and the effect frame layer in this order, and sets this in the display frame buffer. As described above, the main processing (FIG. 23) is loop-processed with a period of 1/30 second. Therefore, the effect control device 300 can generate image data (frame) updated every 1/30 second and display it on the display device 41 .

[Rotation Mode of Large Pattern Object]
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing how the large pattern object 610C (medium pattern) fluctuates during high-speed fluctuation display. FIG. 37(a) has a variation mode in which the identification information is switched each time the large pattern object 610C (medium pattern) rotates 180 degrees as described above. In FIG. 37(a), the large pattern object 610C changes the shape of the pattern so that it rotates 60 degrees when one frame is switched, and can rotate 180 degrees when three frames are switched. The VDP 312 may generate data of an oblique object (60 degrees, 120 degrees, etc.) from the data of the reference object (0 degrees, 180 degrees) stored in the image ROM 325 by image processing, or may generate the data of the reference object ( 0 degrees or 180 degrees) and tilted objects (60 degrees, 120 degrees, etc.) may all be stored in the image ROM 325 in advance.

In addition, in the large pattern object 610C rotated 60 degrees from the front view (or back face) on which the identification information is displayed, the identification information "7" is displayed as a diagonally viewed figure. , the figure may be omitted. Furthermore, in the large pattern object 610C rotated 120 degrees from the front view (or back face), the outer shape of the identification information "7" is left-right reversed and a figure viewed obliquely is displayed. However, the figure may be omitted.

Here, the large pattern object 610C has identification information (for example, "7") written on the front or back surface of a rectangular plate-like main body, but the main body itself is transparent except for the frame of the main body. (The same applies to the cases shown in FIGS. 37(b) and 37(c) described later).

FIG. 37(b) has a variation mode in which the identification information is switched each time the large symbol object 610C (medium symbol) rotates 360 degrees. In FIG. 37(b), the large design object 610C changes the shape of the design so that it rotates 120 degrees when one frame is switched, and can rotate 360 degrees when three frames are switched.

In addition, in the large pattern object 610C rotated 120 degrees from the front view (or back face) on which the identification information is displayed, the outer shape of the identification information "7" is left-right reversed and viewed obliquely. is displayed, but the figure may be omitted. Furthermore, in the large pattern object 610C rotated 240 degrees from the front view (or back face), the outer shape of the identification information "7" is left-right reversed and a figure viewed obliquely is displayed. However, the figure may be omitted.

FIG. 37(c) has a variation mode in which the identification information is switched every time the large pattern object 610C (medium pattern) rotates 180 degrees. In FIG. 37(c), the large design object 610C changes the shape of the design so that it rotates 60 degrees when one frame is switched, and can rotate 180 degrees when three frames are switched.

Also, in the large pattern object 610C rotated 60 degrees from the obverse (or reverse) front view, the identification information "7" is displayed obliquely. In the large pattern object 610C rotated by 120 degrees from the initial posture, a graphic in which the switched identification information "8" is viewed obliquely is displayed.

[First modification of high-speed fluctuation display]
FIG. 38 is a screen transition diagram (previous stage) showing how the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the reserved objects 633, 633a during high-speed variation display fluctuate or change (first modification). . FIG. 39 is a screen transition diagram (second stage) showing the variation mode or variation mode (first modification) of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the reserved objects 633, 633a during high-speed variation display. . FIG. 40 is a table showing the relationship between the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small pattern object 615, and the reserved objects 633, 633a during high-speed fluctuation display and the variation mode or variation mode (first modification) and the frame. .

As a first modification of the high-speed fluctuation display, the effect control device 300 (display control means) displays the large symbol objects 610A and 610B (first large symbol objects) along the vertical direction in the order in which the identification information (first identification information) is switched. A plurality of first large pattern objects 610A and 610B are displayed side by side along a straight line route (specific route), and a plurality of first large pattern objects 610A and 610B having the same shape are displayed for the same period. The first large pattern objects 610A and 610B are vertically scrolled (scrolled).

For example, as shown in (b1) of FIG. 38, the large pattern object 610A includes, from the top, a large pattern object 610A (A1) with identification information of "3", and a large pattern object with identification information of "2". 610A (A2) and a large pattern object 610A (A3) having identification information of "1" form an object row in which they are arranged. Similarly, the large pattern object 610B includes, from the top, a large pattern object 610B (B1) with identification information of "5", a large pattern object 610B (B2) with identification information of "4", and a large pattern object 610B (B2) with identification information of "3". Large pattern objects 610B (B3) with identification information form an array of objects.

The large pattern object 610A (A1, A2, A3) and the large pattern object 610B (B1, B2, B3) display the same identification information during the same period. And vertical scrolling of the large pattern object 610B (B1, B2, B3) can be displayed. For example, when the identification information is switched once, the identification information before the switching disappears in the large pattern object 610A (A3), and the identification information displayed before the switching of the large pattern object 610A (A2) is displayed. be. Further, in the large symbol object 610A (A2), the identification information before switching disappears, and the identification information displayed before switching by the large symbol object 610A (A1) is displayed. Also, in the large pattern object 610A (A1), the identification information before switching is replaced with the identification information after switching.

Similarly, in the large pattern object 610B (B3), the identification information before switching disappears, and the identification information displayed by the large pattern object 610B (B2) before switching is displayed. Further, in the large symbol object 610B (B2), the identification information before switching disappears, and the identification information displayed by the large symbol object 610B (B1) before switching is displayed. Also, in the large pattern object 610B (B1), the identification information before switching is replaced with the identification information after switching.

Therefore, the same identification information is scrolled from top to bottom each time the switching is repeated, and the identification numbers appearing on the large pattern object 610A (A1) and the large pattern object 610B (B1) are sequentially scrolled. When the identification information is displayed in the order of 1 to 9 by scrolling from top to bottom, the identification information is displayed in the order of 1 to 9.

The large pattern objects 610A (A1, A2, A3) and the large pattern objects 610B (B1, B2, B3) have identification information displayed on their rectangular plate-shaped main bodies. The scrolling of the identification information can be recognized, but the recognition of the scrolling of the main body may be difficult.

Therefore, although omitted in the drawing, in the large pattern object 610A (A1, A2, A3) and the large pattern object 610B (B1, B2, B3), by associating the color of the main body with the identification information, the main body It can be made to recognize that it is scrolling. For example, (1, red), (2, green), (3, blue), (4, red), (5, green), (6, blue), (7, red ), (8, green), and (9, blue), it is possible to recognize that the body having the same identification information is scrolling from top to bottom. In particular, according to the above association, the same color does not appear at two or more locations in the object row at the same time, so that it is possible to easily recognize that the main body having the same identification information is scrolling from top to bottom. In addition, as another pattern, (1, green), (2, blue), (3, red), (4, blue), (5, green), (6, blue), (7, red), (8 , blue), (9, green). That is, the large pattern object 610A (A1) and the large pattern object 610A (A2) have different color schemes, and the large pattern object 610A (A2) and the large pattern object 610A (A3) have different color schemes. Similarly, the large pattern object 610B (B1) and the large pattern object 610B (B2) have different color schemes, and the large pattern object 610B (B2) and the large pattern object 610B (B3) have different color schemes. Note that (1, green) and (9, green) have the same color, but it is sufficient if the color scheme is different for at least the plurality of identification information 1 to 9 that circles. The first large pattern object and the last large pattern object corresponding to the identification information 9 may be made the same color to facilitate recognition of the round.

Therefore, a plurality of large pattern objects 610A (A1, A2, A3) and large pattern objects 610B (B1, B2, B3) are arranged along a specific route (vertical direction) in the order in which one round of identification information switches, and the identification information It is preferable that the large pattern objects 610A and 610B, which are related colors and are adjacent to each other along the specific path, are displayed in different color schemes. That is, the identification information and the color information are associated so that the same color is not displayed continuously during scrolling. As a result, the player can easily recognize that not only the identification information but also the object bodies of the large pattern objects 610A (A1, A2, A3) and the large pattern objects 610B (B1, B2, B3) are scrolling. can.

Description will be made according to (b1) to (b11) shown in FIGS. Since the transition modes of the reserved objects 633 and 633a and the small symbol object 615 are the same as those shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the description thereof is omitted.

In the frame 101 shown in (b1) of FIG. 38, the large pattern object 610A is arranged in an object row in which the identification information of "3" (A1), "2" (A2), and "1" (A3) are arranged in order from the top. The large pattern object 610B is an object string in which the identification information of "5" (B1), "4" (B2), and "3" (B3) are arranged in order from the top. The object string of the large pattern object 610A and the object string of the large pattern object 610B may have different identification information strings as shown in the figure, or may have the same identification information string. Also, the large pattern object 610C is displayed with the identification information "7" viewed from the front.

In the frame 102 shown in (b2) of FIG. 38, the object row of the large pattern object 610A and the object row of the large pattern object 610B maintain the identification information displayed in the frame 101, respectively. Also, the large pattern object 610C is displayed with the object main body rotated by 60 degrees, and displays a graphic in which the identification information "7" is viewed obliquely.

In the frame 103 shown in (b3) of FIG. 38, the object row of the large pattern object 610A and the object row of the large pattern object 610B maintain the identification information displayed in the frames 101 and 102, respectively. Also, the large pattern object 610C is displayed with the object main body rotated by 120 degrees, and displays a figure in which the outer shape of the identification information "7" is horizontally reversed and viewed obliquely.

In the frame 104 shown in (b4) of FIG. 38, the large pattern object 610A is arranged in an object row in which the identification information of "4" (A1), "3" (A2), and "2" (A3) are arranged in order from the top. Then, the large pattern object 610B switches to an object string in which the identification information of "6" (B1), "5" (B2), and "4" (B3) are arranged in order from the top. Also, the large pattern object 610C is displayed in a state where the identification information is switched to "8" and viewed from the front.

In the frame 105 shown in (b5) of FIG. 38, the object row of the large pattern object 610A and the object row of the large pattern object 610B maintain the identification information displayed in the frame 104, respectively. Also, the large pattern object 610C is displayed with the object main body rotated by 60 degrees, and displays a graphic in which the identification information "8" is viewed obliquely.

In frame 106 shown in (b6) of FIG. 38, the object row of large pattern object 610A and the object row of large pattern object 610B maintain the identification information displayed in frames 104 and 105, respectively. Also, the large pattern object 610C is displayed with the object main body rotated by 120 degrees, and displays a figure in which the outer shape of the identification information "8" is horizontally reversed and viewed obliquely.

In the frame 107 shown in (b7) of FIG. 38, the large pattern object 610A is arranged in an object row in which the identification information of "5" (A1), "4" (A2), and "3" (A3) are arranged in order from the top. Then, the large pattern object 610B switches to an object string in which the identification information of "7" (B1), "6" (B2), and "5" (B3) are arranged in order from the top. Also, the large pattern object 610C is displayed in a state where the identification information is switched to "9" and viewed from the front.

In the frame 108 shown in (b8) of FIG. 38, the object row of the large pattern object 610A and the object row of the large pattern object 610B maintain the identification information displayed in the frame 107, respectively. Also, the large pattern object 610C is displayed with the object body rotated by 60 degrees, and displays a graphic in which the identification information "9" is viewed obliquely.

In the frame 113 shown in (b9) of FIG. 39, the large pattern object 610A is arranged in an object row in which the identification information of "7" (A1), "6" (A2), and "5" (A3) are arranged in order from the top. Then, the large pattern object 610B switches to an object string in which the identification information of "9" (B1), "8" (B2), and "7" (B3) are arranged in order from the top. Also, the large pattern object 610C is displayed with the identification information switched to "2" and viewed from the front.

In the frame 119 shown in (b10) of FIG. 39, the large pattern object 610A is arranged in an object row in which the identification information of "9" (A1), "8" (A2), and "7" (A3) are arranged in order from the top. Then, the large pattern object 610B switches to an object string in which the identification information of "2" (B1), "1" (B2), and "9" (B3) are arranged in order from the top. Also, the large pattern object 610C is displayed in a state where the identification information is switched to "4" and viewed from the front.

In the frame 125 shown in (b11) of FIG. 39, the large pattern object 610A is arranged in an object row in which the identification information of "2" (A1), "1" (A2), and "9" (A3) are arranged in order from the top. Then, the large pattern object 610B switches to an object string in which the identification information of "4" (B1), "3" (B2), and "2" (B3) are arranged in order from the top. Also, the large pattern object 610C is displayed in a state where the identification information is switched to "6" and viewed from the front.

FIG. 40 summarizes the contents shown in the transition diagrams of FIGS. 38 and 39 in a table. As shown in FIG. 40, a large pattern object 610A (FIG. 40: left (A1, A2, A3)) and a large pattern object 610B (FIG. 40: right (B1, B2, B3)) are identically identified in three frames. maintain information. In addition, the large pattern object 610C (FIG. 40: middle) maintains the same identification information for one frame, but two frames are used to display a figure in which the identification information is rotated. there is Therefore, the period until the identification information is switched is the same for the large symbol object 610A, the large symbol object 610B, and the large symbol object 610C. As described above, the identification information of the small pattern object 615 is switched for each frame.

Suspended objects 633 and 633a shown in FIGS. 38 and 39 transition according to "suspended A" in FIG. 40, the period during which the same form is displayed is 6 frames (200 ms), and the period in which the form changes is 24 frames. (800 ms). By the way, the production control device 300 performs the prefetch production (pending change notice, etc.) for the holding display (holding objects 633, 633a) as described above (FIG. 28: B1712), for example, the higher the expectation of the big hit, the more conspicuous it is The mode (here, color) is changed to produce an effect suggesting the degree of expectation.

For example, "suspended A" in FIG. 40 is a pre-reading announcement effect when the degree of expectation is "low", and the pending objects 633 and 633a are also displayed in white, for example. "Hold B" in FIG. 40 is, for example, a pre-reading announcement effect when the expectation level is "medium", and is displayed in blue, for example. In the case of "suspension B", the period during which the same form is displayed is 4 frames (133 ms), and the period in which the form changes is 16 frames (533 ms). "Holding C" in FIG. 40 is, for example, a pre-reading announcement effect when the degree of expectation is "high", and is displayed in red, for example. In the case of "suspension C", the period during which the same form is displayed is two frames (67 ms), and the period in which the form changes is eight frames (267 ms). Of course, the suspended objects 633 and 633a may change their forms each time one frame is switched. is 4 frames (133 ms).

As described above, when "suspension A", "suspension B", and "suspension C" are used to represent the degree of expectation of a big hit, they can be used separately according to the degree of expectation related to each of the reservation objects 633, 633a. can.

Also, any one of the form changes (shape changes) of "suspension A", "suspension B", and "suspension C" may be applied to all the suspension objects 633, 633a. During the probability change state, while the pseudo continuous effect is occurring, apply "suspension B" or "suspension C" to all the suspension objects 633, 633a, and when these are completed, "suspension A" may be applied. Note that the pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the pseudo-variation of changing and temporarily stopping the identification information is performed a predetermined number of times in one variation display game.

Further, when there are three pseudo-variations in the pseudo-continuous effect, the morphological change of "suspension A" is applied to all the suspended objects 633 and 633a in the first pseudo-variation, and all of them in the second pseudo-variation may be applied to the retained objects 633 and 633a of the third time, and to all the retained objects 633 and 633a in the third pseudo change. As described above, it is also preferable to appropriately change the cycle in which the forms of the suspended objects 633 and 633a change according to the game state.

41A and 41B are diagrams showing change modes (variation modes) of the retained objects 633 and 633a, where (a) shows a large amplitude of change (fluctuation), and (b) shows a medium amplitude of change (fluctuation). In one case, (c) shows the case where the amplitude of the change (fluctuation) is small. Note that in this embodiment, the retained objects 633 and 633a are displayed so that their widths change (fluctuation, deformation) in one direction (width direction, horizontal direction), but they are displayed as if they are all displayed toward the center (radially). It may be displayed so as to contract or expand exponentially.

As described above, the retained objects 633 and 633a can change the period of change in their form, but if the period is long and the amplitude of change is the same for short periods, it may give an unnatural impression. be. Therefore, in the case of "hold A", as shown in (a), a large amplitude is applied, and in the case of "hold B", a smaller amplitude than (a) is applied as shown in (b), and "hold In the case of C", it is preferable to apply an amplitude smaller than that of (b) as shown in (c) so that the periodic changes of the retained objects 633 and 633a are performed more naturally.

[Display Mode of Low-Speed Fluctuation Display at Start of Fluctuation Display Game]
FIG. 42 is a screen transition diagram (previous stage) showing how the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the reserved objects 633, 633a change or change at the start of the variable display game. FIG. 43 is a screen transition diagram (second stage) showing how the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the reserved objects 633, 633a change or change when the variable display game starts. FIG. 44 is a table showing the relationship between the variation mode or change mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the reserved objects 633, 633a at the start of the variable display game and the frame.

Here, the variation mode or change mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the reserved objects 633, 633a at the start of the variable display game will be described.

The variable display game is started when the reserved object 633a is displayed in the reserved consumption area 640. FIG.

When the variable display game is started, the identification information of the small symbol object 615 is switched each time one frame is switched, as in the case of high-speed variation. The suspended objects 633 and 633a switch their modes every time 6 frames (4 frames, 2 frames, or 1 frame may be used) are switched regardless of the execution of the variable display game.

On the other hand, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C perform a preliminary action, and then shift to low speed fluctuation (low speed fluctuation 1). In the preparatory operation, the large pattern object 610C does not rotate yet, and the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C simultaneously move in the direction opposite to the scroll direction, that is, upward, and then start vertical scrolling. When 610C returns to the initial position, it stays in place and starts rotation variation. Also, during the preliminary operation, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C are displayed larger than normal (for example, during low speed fluctuation, medium speed fluctuation, high speed fluctuation), and return to the original size when the preliminary operation is completed. It's like Furthermore, during the preliminary operation, the periods during which the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C display their identification information are the same.

In frame 1 shown in (c1) of FIG. 42 , each reserved object 633 is moved to the right by the reserved shift, and the reserved object 633a is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640, and the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C are displayed in the variable display area 610. is displayed in the center (initial position) in the height direction.

Here, the large pattern object 610A displays the identification information "2", the large pattern object 610B displays the identification information "4", and the large pattern object 610C displays the identification information "7". identification information may be displayed. In addition, in the same manner as described above, two pending objects 633 are displayed in the pending display unit 630a, the pending number "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 pending number display unit 650, and the special figure 2 pending number display unit 660 , the number of reservations "0" is displayed.

Also, the form of the suspended object 633a is switched from the "medium" shape to the "large" shape at the start of the variable display game, but the timing of the start of the variable display game and the timing of switching the modes of the suspended objects 633 and 633a are the same. It doesn't have to be. Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "seven".

In frame 7 shown in (c2) of FIG. 42, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C are positioned at a height position (for example, 300 pixels or 240 pixels in pixel units (pixels) of the display device 41) in the middle of the preliminary operation from the initial position. ). At this time, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C can be displayed (the same applies hereinafter) in such a manner that they move in steps of a predetermined interval (for example, 50 pixels or 40 pixels) every frame. You may make it move for every frame. The forms of the reserved objects 633 and 633a are switched from the "large" shape to the "medium" shape. Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "four".

In frame 12 shown in (c3) of FIG. 42, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C have moved to the highest position (for example, 550 pixels or 440 pixels higher than the initial position) in the preliminary operation. The reserved objects 633 and 633a maintain their forms (shape "medium"). Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "9".

In frame 13 shown in (c4) of FIG. 42, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C have moved to a position one step (eg, 50 pixels or 40 pixels) lower than the highest position in the preliminary operation. The forms of the reserved objects 633 and 633a are switched from the "medium" shape to the "small" shape. Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "one".

In the frame 19 shown in (c5) of FIG. 42, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C have moved to a position seven steps (eg, 350 pixels or 280 pixels) lower than the highest position in the preliminary operation. The forms of the reserved objects 633 and 633a are switched from the "small" shape to the "medium" shape. Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "seven".

In frame 23 shown in (c6) of FIG. 42, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C have moved to their initial positions, and the preparatory motion is completed. After that, the large pattern object 610C stops moving in the vertical direction from this frame 23 and starts the low-speed fluctuation display due to rotational fluctuation. Also, the large pattern objects 610A and 610B continue to move vertically, and start slow-moving display by vertical scrolling. Furthermore, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C return to their normal sizes. The reserved objects 633 and 633a maintain their forms (shape "medium"). Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "2".

In frame 25 shown in (c7) of FIG. 42, large pattern objects 610A and 610B have moved to positions two steps lower than their initial positions. The large pattern object 610C is displayed in a form in which the identification information "7" is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60 degrees) from a posture in which the identification information "7" is viewed from the front. ing. The forms of the reserved objects 633 and 633a are switched from the "medium" shape to the "large" shape. Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "four".

Here, the large pattern object 610C has a display mode in which it rotates 30 degrees per frame (Fig. 44: Rotation 1), and the identification information is rotated 360 degrees from the posture in which the identification information is viewed from the front. shall switch. Also, the large pattern object 610C displayed in (c7) represents a figure rotated by less than 180 degrees from the posture in which the identification information is viewed from the front, and the large pattern object 610C displayed in (c8) described later is assumed to be a figure rotated by an axis of less than 180 degrees. The pattern object 610C represents a figure that is axially rotated by 180 degrees or more and less than 360 degrees from the orientation in which the identification information is viewed from the front.

In the frame 31 shown in (c8) of FIG. 42, the large pattern objects 610A and 610B have moved to positions eight steps lower than their initial positions. The large pattern object 610C is displayed in a form in which the identification information "7" is rotated 240 degrees from the posture in which the identification information "7" is viewed from the front. is doing. The forms of the reserved objects 633 and 633a are switched from the "large" shape to the "medium" shape. Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "one".

In frame 35 shown in (c9) of FIG. 43, large pattern objects 610A and 610B are displayed at the top. Then, the identification information of the large pattern object 610A switches from "2" to "3", and the identification information of the large pattern object 610B switches from "4" to "5". After this, the large pattern objects 610A and 610B move by two steps each time one frame is switched. The large pattern object 610C is displayed in a state where the identification information is switched to "8" and "8" is viewed from the front. The reserved objects 633 and 633a maintain their forms (shape "medium"). Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "five".

In frame 37 shown in (c10) of FIG. 43, large pattern objects 610A and 610B are displayed at positions four steps down from the top. The large pattern object 610C is displayed in a form in which the identification information "8" is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60 degrees) from a posture in which the identification information "8" is viewed from the front. ing. The forms of the reserved objects 633 and 633a are switched from the "medium" shape to the "small" shape. Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "seven".

In the frame 43 shown in (c11) of FIG. 43, the large pattern objects 610A and 610B have each moved to a position five steps lower than the initial position. The large pattern object 610C is displayed in a form in which the identification information "8" is rotated by 240 degrees from the posture in which the identification information "8" is viewed from the front. is doing. The forms of the reserved objects 633 and 633a are switched from the "small" shape to the "medium" shape. Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "four".

In frame 47 shown in (c12) of FIG. 43, large pattern objects 610A and 610B are displayed at the top. Then, the identification information of the large pattern object 610A switches from "3" to "4", and the identification information of the large pattern object 610B switches from "5" to "6". The large pattern object 610C rotates 360 axes from the posture of the frame 35, the identification information is switched to "9", and the "9" is displayed in a front view. The reserved objects 633 and 633a maintain their forms (shape "medium"). Also, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "8".

After that, in the variable display game, the variable display shifts in the order of medium-speed fluctuation, high-speed fluctuation, medium-speed fluctuation, and low-speed fluctuation (low-speed fluctuation 2) (described later). Although it has been explained that the small pattern object 615 is variably displayed from frame 1, it may be variably displayed after frame 23, that is, after the preparatory operation is completed.

44 shows the number of frames in the transition diagrams of FIGS. 42 and 43, identification information and positions of large pattern objects 610A (FIG. 44: left pattern) and 610B (FIG. 44: right pattern), large pattern object 610C (FIG. 44: medium pattern) identification information and position or rotation angle, form changes of the reserved objects 633 and 633a, and identification information of the small pattern object 615 are shown in a table.

Here, the "position" (the number of steps) in FIG. 44 is the position in the height direction on the display device 41, and "0" indicates the initial position (center in the height direction). Also, "-1" is a position raised by one step from the initial position as a reference. Conversely, "+1" indicates a position lowered by one step from the initial position. "Rotation" is the rotation angle of the axis rotation of the large pattern object 610C, and there are four patterns of "rotation 1", "rotation 2", "rotation 3", and "rotation 4" as described later. 42 and 43, "rotation 1" is applied.

As described above, the small pattern object 615 switches the identification information each time one frame is switched. The reserved objects 633 and 633a display the same form for 6 frames, and change the form periodically using 24 frames.

The large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C rise from the initial position of the frame 1 by one step each time the frame is switched to reach the highest position in the frame 12, and then descend by one step each time the frame is switched. The preparatory operation is completed by returning to the initial position at frame 23 . At this time, the large pattern object 610C has not yet changed its rotation.

After frame 23, low-speed variation (low-speed variation 1) is started, and large pattern objects 610A and 610B continue to descend step by step each time the frame changes and reach the lowest position in frame . On the other hand, the large pattern object 610C starts to rotate 30 degrees each time the frame is switched, and rotates 330 degrees in the frame 34 . Here, it is preferable that the large pattern object 610C overshoots the initial position once and returns to the initial position, instead of stopping the height position at the initial position after the start of rotation fluctuation. For example, as shown in FIG. 44, the frames 24 to 26 are lowered step by step, and then the frames 27 to 29 are raised step by step to return to the initial position. This makes it possible to enhance the sense of physicality of the large pattern object 610C.

In the frame 35, the large pattern objects 610A and 610B are displayed at a position (uppermost position) 11 steps higher than the initial position, and the identification information is switched. Also, the large pattern object 610C is also rotated 360 degrees, and the identification information is switched. After that, the large pattern object 610C is rotated by 30 degrees each time the frame is switched, similarly to the previous time. On the other hand, the large pattern objects 610A and 610B descend by two steps each time the frame is switched.

In the frame 46, the large pattern objects 610A and 610B move to a position (lowermost position) 11 steps lower than the initial position, and the large pattern object 610C rotates 330 degrees as before.

In the frame 47, the large pattern objects 610A and 610B are displayed at a position (uppermost position) 11 steps higher than the initial position, and the identification information is switched. Also, the large pattern object 610C is also rotated 360 degrees, and the identification information is switched. As a result, the low-speed variation (low-speed variation 1) can be terminated, and the medium-speed variation and high-speed variation can be performed.

In medium-speed variation, the large pattern objects 610A and 610B are vertically scrolled in 7 stages of -11, -7, -3, 0, +3, +7, +11 using the position of FIG. 44 as the first stage. , and as the second step, vertical scrolling may be performed in five steps of -11, -6, 0, +6, and +11. In high-speed variation, vertical scrolling may be performed in three stages of -11, 0, and +11.

In addition, the large pattern object 610C rotates in seven stages of 0 degrees, 60 degrees, 120 degrees, 180 degrees, 240 degrees, 270 degrees, and 330 degrees as the first stage of medium speed variation. , 0 degrees, 72 degrees, 144 degrees, 216 degrees, and 288 degrees. Do it.

In FIGS. 42 and 43, the low-speed fluctuation display is performed from frame 24 to frame 46, but the display period at this time is 23 frames (766 ms). Also, the low-speed variation display may be from frame 24 to frame 35, and in this case, the display period of the low-speed variation display is 12 frames (400 ms). In addition, it is preferable that the display period of medium-speed fluctuation display (first stage) is 462 ms (14 frames) and the display period of medium-speed fluctuation display (second stage) is 333 ms (10 frames). Furthermore, it is preferable to lengthen the display period of the high-speed fluctuation display according to the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game.

On the other hand, in the time-saving state, the preliminary operation is omitted, the low-speed fluctuation is started from frame 23 (the large symbol object 610C does not perform the overshoot operation), and the medium-speed fluctuation is omitted from frame 35 onward. It can be done if it shifts to high-speed fluctuation. Furthermore, the display time of the high-speed fluctuation may be shorter than that in the case of performing the fluctuation display game in the normal game state, and if there is no reach, it may be set to 9 frames (300 ms), for example.

By the way, at the time of low-speed fluctuation, the rotation fluctuation of the large symbol object 610C due to "rotation 1" expresses a state in which the large symbol object 610C always continues to rotate. However, by applying “rotation 2”, “rotation 3”, and “rotation 4” in FIG. 44, the cycle of switching the identification information of the large symbol object 610C (the rotation of the large symbol object 610C starts, rotates 360 degrees and stops) The large pattern object 610C can be stopped for a while while being viewed from the front without changing the period until the next rotation starts.

When "rotation 2" in FIG. 44 is applied, the large pattern object 610C is displayed in a manner that it is rotated by 32.7 degrees (in FIG. 44, the decimal point is rounded off) each time the frame changes after frame 23. , the frame 34 is rotated 360 degrees to switch the identification information, and the identification information is viewed from the front, and the frame 35 also maintains the state of being viewed from the front. As a result, the large pattern object 610C can be stopped with the identification information viewed from the front for one frame (33.3 ms).

When “rotation 3” in FIG. 44 is applied, the large pattern object 610C is displayed in a manner that it rotates 36 degrees every time the frame changes from frame 23 onwards, and in frame 33, it rotates 360 degrees and the identification information switches. In addition, the identification information is viewed from the front, and the frame 34 and the frame 35 maintain the state of being viewed from the front. As a result, the large pattern object 610C can be stopped with the identification information viewed from the front for two frames (66.6 ms).

When "rotation 4" in FIG. 44 is applied, the large pattern object 610C is displayed in such a manner that it rotates 45 degrees each time the frame changes from frame 23 onwards, and rotates 360 degrees in frame 31 to switch the identification information. At the same time, the identification information is viewed from the front, and the state of the identification information viewed from the front is maintained between the frames 31 and 35 as well. As a result, the large pattern object 610C can be stopped with the identification information viewed from the front for four frames (133 ms).

The effect control device 300, for the large symbol object 610C, "rotation 1" (expectation: small), "rotation 2" (expectation : medium), “rotation 3” (expectation: high), and “rotation 4” (expectation: extra-large) may be applied. Also, the size of the large pattern object 610C may be changed according to the manner of rotation. : large)<"rotation 4" (expectation: extra large) may be displayed in order of size. At that time, the identification information may also be displayed so that it is larger than the reference size (for example, the size for "rotation 1") when the image is viewed from the front.

In addition, the production control device 300 applies "rotation 1" to the large symbol object 610C, for example, in the initial state (normal game state), and "rotation 2" during the reach, the variable probability state, and the pseudo continuous production. , “rotation 3” or “rotation 4” may be applied. Furthermore, when the pseudo-continuous effect occurs, the effect control device 300 performs “rotation 1”, “rotation 2”, “rotation 3”, and “rotation 4” in the order of repeating the simulated variation for the large symbol object 610C. may apply.

[Display Mode of Low-Speed Fluctuation Display at End of Fluctuation Display Game]
FIG. 45 is a screen transition diagram (previous stage) showing how the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the reserved objects 633, 633a change or change when the variable display game ends (or freeze effect). be. FIG. 46 is a screen transition diagram (second stage) showing how the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the reserved objects 633 and 633a change or change when the variable display game ends (or freeze effect). be. FIG. 47 is a table showing the relationship between the variation mode or change mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the pending objects 633, 633a and the frame when the variable display game ends (or freeze effect). is.

Here, the variation mode or change mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the reserved objects 633, 633a before the end of the variable display game will be described.

The low-speed variation (low-speed variation 2) at the end of the variation display game is performed after high-speed variation and medium-speed variation (second stage, first stage in that order). In the low-speed variation, the rotation variation ends with the identification information of the large symbol object 610C viewed from the front, and the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C move up and down in the scroll direction (temporary stop display).

When the identification information is switched, the large pattern objects 610A and 610B are displayed at the uppermost position (-11) as described above, and at this time, the large pattern object 610C is also displayed with the identification information viewed from the front. However, the variable display of the large symbol object 610C may be temporarily stopped until the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are scrolled downward to reach the same height as the large symbol object 610C.

The reserved objects 633 and 633a are, unlike the above, circular flat characters, and are displayed in a display mode that rotates about the same axis as the large symbol object 610C while maintaining the same shape regardless of the execution of the variable display game. shall be prepared. Note that the identification information of the small pattern object 615 is switched each time one frame is switched until the variable display ends. Also, in the special figure 1 reserved number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display unit 660, the number "2" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number and the number "0" indicating the special figure 2 reserved number are displayed respectively. ing.

In the frame 301 shown in (d1) of FIG. 45, the large pattern object 610A and the large pattern object 610B display the same identification information "3" and are at the same height as the large pattern object 610C (Fig. 47: position "0" (Fig. 44 to the same height position as the position "0")). The large pattern object 610C is also displayed with the identification information "3" viewed from the front. Both of the reserved objects 633 and 633a are displayed with the character viewed from the front. The small pattern object 615 displays, for example, the identification information "one".

In a frame 307 shown in (d2) of FIG. 45, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C display the same identification information "3" and descend by one step each time one frame is switched from the frame 301 (for example, 25 steps per step). pixels, or 20 pixels), moving to the lowest stage in the swing variation (Fig. 47: position "+6").

The retained objects 633 and 633a are rotated 90 degrees by rotating the axis 15 degrees (FIG. 47: Rotation 1) every time one frame is switched from the case of the frame 301, and the character is displayed in a mode viewed from the end face direction. Here, the rotation direction may be such that the left side of the rotation axis faces the back and the right side faces the front, or the rotation may be reversed. The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "seven".

In the frame 313 shown in (d3) of FIG. 45, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C display the same identification information "3" and rise by one step each time one frame is switched from the frame 307, and start shaking fluctuation. It has moved to the initial position (FIG. 47: position "0"). The retained objects 633 and 633a are further rotated 15 degrees each time one frame is switched from the case of the frame 307 (Fig. 47: Rotation 1) to rotate the axis 90 degrees, and the character is left-right reversed from (d1) (character is viewed from the back). The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "four".

In the frame 319 shown in (d4) of FIG. 45, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C display the same identification information "3" and rise by one step each time one frame is switched from the frame 313, resulting in the highest shaking fluctuation. It has moved to the position (Fig. 47: position "-6"). The retained objects 633 and 633a are further rotated 15 degrees (FIG. 47: FIG. 1) each time one frame is switched from the case of the frame 319, thereby rotating the axes 90 degrees and displaying the character as seen from the end face direction. there is The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "one".

In the frame 325 shown in (d5) of FIG. 45, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C display the same identification information "3" and descend by one step every time one frame is switched from the frame 325 to the initial position ( Figure 47: Moved to position "0"). The reserved objects 633 and 633a are further rotated 15 degrees (FIG. 47: Rotation 1) each time one frame is switched from the case of the frame 319, thereby rotating the axis 90 degrees. As a result, the large pattern object 610C is rotated 360 degrees from the attitude of the frame 301, and the character is displayed in a front view as in (d1). The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "seven".

In the frame 331 shown in (d6) of FIG. 45, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C display the same identification information "3" and descend by one step each time one frame is switched from the frame 325. (Fig. 47: position "+6"). The suspended objects 633 and 633a are rotated 90 degrees by rotating the axis 15 degrees (FIG. 47: Rotation 1) every time one frame is switched from the case of the frame 301, and the character is displayed in a state viewed from the end face direction. . The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "four".

In a frame 337 shown in (d7) of FIG. 45, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C display the same identification information "3" and rise by one step each time one frame is switched from the frame 331, and start shaking and fluctuating. It has moved to the initial position (FIG. 47: position "0"). The retained objects 633 and 633a are further rotated 15 degrees each time one frame is switched from the case of the frame 331 (Fig. 47: Rotation 1) to rotate the axis 90 degrees, and the character is horizontally reversed from (d5) (character is viewed from the back). The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "one".

In the frame 343 shown in (d8) of FIG. 45, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C display the same identification information "3" and rise by one step each time one frame is switched from the frame 337, and the shaking fluctuation is the highest. It has moved to the position (Fig. 47: position "-6"). The retained objects 633 and 633a are further rotated 15 degrees (Fig. 47: Rotation 1) each time one frame is switched from the case of the frame 319, so that they are rotated 90 degrees, and the character is displayed in a state viewed from the end face direction. there is The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "seven".

In a frame 349 shown in (d9) of FIG. 46, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C display the same identification information "3" and descend by one step every time one frame is switched from the frame 325 to the initial position ( Fig. 47: Movement to position "0") ends the swing variation. The reserved objects 633 and 633a are further rotated 15 degrees (FIG. 47: Rotation 1) each time one frame is switched from the case of the frame 343, thereby rotating the axis 90 degrees. As a result, the large pattern object 610A is rotated 360 degrees from the posture of the frame 325, and is displayed in a state in which the character is viewed from the front. Also, at this time, if the variable display game ends, the pending object 633a disappears. The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "four", and when the shaking fluctuation stops, the fluctuation display of the small pattern object 615 also ends. Then, for example, after maintaining the contents of the frame 349 from the frame 349 to the frame 354, a big win fanfare effect (FIG. 32: B2102) is performed.

In (d10) of FIG. 46, the identification information "333" at the time of the big win and the character information "Congratulations on the big win" are displayed. In addition, when (d1) to (d9) in FIG. 46 are freeze effects, after that, the suspended object 633a does not disappear and the scroll fluctuation or rotation fluctuation resumes, or the suspended object 633a disappears and the next Switch to a variable display game. In the temporary stop display period (shaking fluctuation display period), the periods during which the identification information is displayed by the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C are the same.

FIG. 47 shows frame numbers, positions of large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C (FIG. 47: large pattern), rotation angles of axis rotation of pending objects 633 and 633a, and small pattern objects in the screen transition diagrams of FIGS. 615 identification information is tabulated.

46 and 47, the temporary stop display period (shaking fluctuation display period) and the stop symbol display period (the above-mentioned stop display time) are omitted, but the effect control device 300 performs the preliminary operation display shown in FIG. , the sizes of the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C may be displayed to be larger than those during the high-speed fluctuation display period. As a result, attention can be raised to the temporary stop display period (shaking fluctuation display period) and the stop symbol display period (stop display time), and the high-speed fluctuation display is shifted to the stop symbol display period (including the temporary stop display period). The variable display modes of the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C can be easily recognized.

As shown in FIG. 47, large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C start swinging at frame 301 and make one round trip at frame 325. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the shaking period of the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C is 24 frames. In addition, the retained objects 633 and 633a (rotated by "rotation 1") are also rotated 360 degrees in the frame 325 with the frame 301 as the reference. Therefore, the rotation period of the retained objects 633 and 633a is also 24 frames (800 ms). The identification information of the small pattern object 615 (FIG. 47: small pattern) is switched each time one frame is switched. finish.

Other rotation modes are also applicable to the reserved objects 633 and 633a. For example, when "rotation 2" in FIG. 47 is applied, by displaying a mode in which the axis rotates 7.5 degrees each time one frame is switched, It can be rotated on its axis.

Further, the holding objects 633 and 633a can be displayed in a display mode in which the rotation of the axis is stopped for a predetermined time while the character is viewed from the front. For example, when "rotation 3" is applied, the character is rotated by 18 degrees each time one frame is switched based on the state in which the character is viewed from the front in the frame 301, and rotated by 360 degrees in the frame 321 to make the character to be viewed from the front again. However, the display mode is maintained in frames 322-325. Therefore, in "rotation 3", the suspended objects 633 and 633a can be stopped for four frames (133 ms) of frames 321-324.

In addition, when "rotation 3" is applied, the character is rotated 30 degrees each time the frame is switched based on the state in which the character is viewed from the front in frame 301, and the character is rotated 360 degrees in frame 313 to display the character viewed from the front. However, the display mode is maintained in frames 314-325. Therefore, in "rotation 3", the suspended objects 633 and 633a can be stopped for 12 frames (400 ms) from frames 313 to 324. FIG.

Here, for example, "rotation 1", "rotation 3", and "rotation 4" can be applied as representing the degree of expectation of the big hit for the special figure variation display game related to the reserved objects 633, 633a. Rotation 1" (low expectations), "Rotation 3" (medium expectations), and "Rotation 4" (high expectations). Of course, the colors of the pending objects 633 and 633a may be changed according to the degree of expectation in the same manner as described above. Also, "rotation 1", "rotation 3", and "rotation 4" can be used separately according to the degree of expectation for each of the reserved objects 633 and 633a.

In addition, it is also preferable to display the retained objects 633 and 633a in a larger size as the ratio of the time for which the retained objects 633 and 633a are viewed from the front is larger. The size of the reserved objects 633 and 633a at "rotation 3"<the size of the reserved objects 633 and 633a at "rotation 4" may be displayed. Furthermore, the size of the retained objects 633 and 633a is larger than the reference size (for example, the size of the retained objects 633 and 633a at "rotation 1") only when the characters of the retained objects 633 and 633a are viewed from the front. may be displayed in a larger size.

Also, for example, one of "rotation 3" and "rotation 4" may be applied to all the suspended objects 633 and 633a. "Rotation 3" or "Rotation 4" may be applied to objects 633, 633a, and when these are finished, "Rotation 1" may be applied to all pending objects 633, 633a.

Further, when there are three pseudo-variations in the pseudo-continuous effect, "rotation 1" is applied to all the suspended objects 633 and 633a in the first pseudo-variation, and all suspended objects in the second pseudo-variation "Rotation 3" may be applied to 633, 633a, and "Rotation 4" may be applied to all of the pending objects 633, 633a in the third pseudo-variation. As described above, the time during which the character of the suspended object 633, 633a is viewed from the front according to the game state, that is, the time from when the suspended object 633, 633a starts rotating until the character stops in the front view and starts rotating again It is also preferable to appropriately change the proportion of time for which the character is made to look straight ahead. In addition, the size of the reserved objects 633 and 633a is set as follows: , 633a may be displayed in larger order.

In FIG. 47, one cycle from "rotation 1" to "rotation 4" may be controlled in the same time (48 frames). Note that the effect control device 300 can manage the 48 frames by associating them with the control pointers 0-47. In this case, "rotation 1", "rotation 3", and "rotation 4" have a rotation mode of two rotations in 48 frames, and "rotation 2" has a rotation mode of one rotation in 48 frames. As a result, even if the presentation control device 300 transitions the rotation mode of one of the reserved objects 633 and 633a at a predetermined timing (for example, transitions from “rotation 2” to “rotation 3”), the rotation after the transition is Starting from the same control pointer value as the other pending objects 633, 633a, all pending objects 633, 633a can be kept in rotational synchronization. In addition, the rotation mode (variable mode) of the retained objects 633 and 633a can be changed based on the cycle of "rotation 2" in FIG. can. Suppose that the retained object 633 is viewed from the front in frame 301 of FIG. 47 and begins to pivot from frame 302 . At this time, "rotation 3'" is newly provided. The objects 633 and 633a can be rotated once to be viewed from the front, and the retained objects 633 and 633a can be stationary from the frame 341 to the frame 349. FIG. In addition, "rotation 4'" is newly provided. The objects 633 and 633a can be rotated once and viewed from the front, and the retained objects 633 and 633a can be stationary from the frame 326 to the frame 349. FIG. At this time, "rotation 1'" (= "rotation 1") rotates at twice the rotational speed of "rotation 2" by retrieving every other angle information used in "rotation 2". It will be. Therefore, "rotation 1'", "rotation 2", "rotation 3'", and "rotation 4'" have different rotation modes, but have the same rotation period (variable period). twice the period). Therefore, when the rotation mode (variable mode) of the retained objects 633, 633a is changed, the rotation mode of the retained objects 633, 633a is changed between "rotation 1'" to "rotation 4'" according to the game state, the production stage, etc. Even in the case of arbitrarily changing the display of the reserved objects 633 and 633a, it is possible to easily control the display of the reserved objects 633 and 633a.

FIG. 48 is a transition diagram showing how the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol objects 615, and the reserved objects 633, 633a change or change (modification) when the variable display game ends (or freeze effect). be. In FIG. 48, the suspended objects 633, 633a do not pivot themselves. However, the reserved object 633, 633a has a decoration object 633b that goes around the reserved object 633, 633a. 47, the decoration object 633b is arranged at the highest position of the periphery (outer shape) of the character of the retained objects 633 and 633a in the frame 301 (frame 325). Each time the character is switched, the character rotates 15 degrees around the center of the character as the axis of rotation and moves along the periphery (outer shape) of the character. As the decoration object 633b, it is preferable to apply, for example, an object having a shape of the sun or a star and having a higher brightness than the reserved objects 633 and 633a.

FIG. 48 describes the transition of large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C, small pattern objects 615, reserved objects 633, 633a, and decoration object 633b following (d5) to (d10) of FIGS. 45 and 46. Therefore, the description of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, etc. will be omitted as appropriate.

In a frame 325 shown in (d5) of FIG. 48, the suspended objects 633 and 633a are stationary with the character viewed from the front, and do not move until the suspended object 633a is digested. The decoration object 633b is placed at the highest position (head) on the periphery of the characters of the reserved objects 633 and 633a.

In the frame 331 shown in (d6) of FIG. 48, the decoration object 633b rotates clockwise (or counterclockwise) along the periphery of the character in a manner that it rotates 15 degrees around the center of the character as the axis of rotation each time the frame is switched. ), and is located at a position (left cheek) moved along the periphery of the character in a manner rotated 90 degrees from the position (head) associated with the frame 325 .

In a frame 337 shown in (d7) of FIG. 48, the decoration object 633b is placed at a position (chin) moved along the periphery of the character in a manner rotated clockwise by 90 degrees from the position (left cheek) associated with the frame 331. It is

In a frame 343 shown in (d8) of FIG. 48, the decoration object 633b is placed at a position (right cheek) moved along the periphery of the character in a manner rotated clockwise by 90 degrees from the position (chin) associated with the frame 337. It is

In a frame 349 shown in (d9) of FIG. 48, the decoration object 633b is placed at a position (head) moved along the periphery of the character in a manner rotated clockwise by 90 degrees from the position (right cheek) associated with the frame 337. , and the decoration object 633b has circumnavigated the periphery of the character. At this time, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C have also undergone one period of swing variation with the frame 325 as a reference. After that, in (d10) of FIG. 48, when the reserved object 633a disappears, the decoration object 633b decorating it also disappears.

It should be noted that "rotation 2", "rotation 3", and "rotation 4" can be applied to this decorative object 633b in accordance with the game state, similarly to the reserved objects 633 and 633a.

When "rotation 2" is applied, the decorative object 633b rotates around the perimeter of the characters (holding objects 633 and 633a) at a cycle twice the shaking cycle.

When "rotation 3" is applied, the period from when the decoration object 633b starts to circle the periphery of the character to when it stops at the head of the character and starts to circle again is the period in which the decoration object 633b moves around the periphery of the character in "rotation 1". Although the period is the same as the period of rotation, the decoration object 633b stops at the character's head for four frames (133 ms).

When "rotation 4" is applied, the period from when the decoration object 633b starts rotating around the character's periphery to when it stops at the character's head and starts rotating again is "rotation 1" when the decoration object 633b moves around the character's periphery. Although the period is the same as that of the rotation, the decoration object 633b stops at the character's head for 12 frames (400 ms).

In addition, the size of the decoration object 633b is displayed larger in the order of, for example, the decoration object 633b to which "rotation 1" is applied<the decoration object 633b to which "rotation 3" is applied<the decoration object 633b to which "rotation 4" is applied. good too.

Although the decoration object 633b is arranged around the peripheries of the retained objects 633 and 633a and moves along the peripheries to rotate around the retained objects 633 and 633a, the decoration objects 633b are arranged inside or outside the peripheries. , and rotate in the same way.

Similar to the above-described reserved objects 633 and 633a, the rotation mode of the decoration object 633b is based on the period of "rotation 2" in FIG. (variable mode) can be changed. Let us consider the case where the decoration object 633b is arranged at the highest position (head) of the periphery of the character in the frame 301 of FIG. At this time, in “rotation 3′”, the decoration object 633b rotates 9 degrees clockwise (or counterclockwise) around the character every frame, and in frame 340, the decoration object 633b rotates around the character. The decoration object 633b is arranged at the highest position (head) of the periphery of the character, and the decoration object 633b from the frame 341 to the frame 349 can be set to a rotation mode in which it stands still at the arrangement position. In "rotation 4'", the decoration object 633b rotates 15 degrees clockwise (or counterclockwise) around the character every frame, and in frame 325, the decoration object 633b rotates around the character. The decoration object 633b can be arranged at the highest position (head) of the periphery of the character, and the decoration object 633b from the frame 326 to the frame 349 can be set to a rotation mode in which it stands still at the arrangement position. At this time, "rotation 1'" (= "rotation 1") rotates at twice the rotational speed of "rotation 2" by retrieving every other angle information used in "rotation 2". It will be. Therefore, "rotation 1'", "rotation 2", "rotation 3'", and "rotation 4'" have different rotation modes, but have the same rotation period (variable period). twice the period). Therefore, when the rotation mode (variable mode) of the decoration object 633b is changed, the rotation mode of the decoration object 633b can be arbitrarily changed between "rotation 1'" and "rotation 4'" according to the game state, production stage, etc. Even in the case of displaying the decoration object 633b, the control for displaying the decoration object 633b can be easily performed.

[Second Modification of Variation During High-Speed Variation Display]
FIG. 49 is a screen transition diagram (previous stage) showing the variation mode or variation mode (second modification) of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the reserved objects 633, 633a during high-speed variation display. . FIG. 50 is a screen transition diagram (second stage) showing the variation mode or variation mode (second modification) of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the reserved objects 633, 633a during high-speed variation display. . In the second modified example, a case will be described in which the length of time (the number of frames) during which the character is viewed from the front changes depending on the size of the retained objects 633 and 633a. Although FIGS. 49 and 50 take high-speed fluctuations as examples, they can also be applied to low-speed fluctuations.

The retained objects 633 and 633a are circular, flat-plate-shaped characters having a display mode that rotates about an axis, as in the cases shown in FIGS. When the characters of the pending objects 633 and 633a are viewed from the front, the pending objects 633 and 633a are not updated for several frames in the rendering display editing process shown in FIG. A display mode is possible in which updating is resumed thereafter and the size is returned to the original size.

In frame 113 of (a9) of FIG. 49 (same timing as (a9) of FIG. 34), large pattern objects 610A and 610B each display identification information "2" at the top position, and large pattern object 610C Although the identification information "2" is displayed in the central portion as viewed from the front, the identification information may be different from each other in the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C. At this time, the held objects 633 and 633a are displayed in a mode in which the character is viewed from the end face direction. The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "one". In the special figure 1 reserved number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display unit 660, the number "2" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number and the number "0" indicating the special figure 2 reserved number are displayed respectively. (same hereafter).

In frame 119 of (a10) of FIG. 49, large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C each display identification information "4" at the same positions as above. The suspended objects 633 and 633a are displayed in a mode that rotates by 7.5 degrees each time one frame is switched (Fig. 47: Rotation 2). It is displayed in a mode viewed from the left side of the rotation axis). The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "seven".

In frame 125 of (a11) of FIG. 49, large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C each display identification information "6" at the same positions as above. The suspended objects 633 and 633a are displayed in a form in which the back side of the character is viewed from the front by rotating the posture displayed in the frame 119 by 45 degrees in the same manner as described above. The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "four".

In the frame 131 of (a12) of FIG. 49, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C each display the identification information "8" at the same positions as above. The retained objects 633 and 633a are displayed in a mode in which the characters are viewed obliquely from the back side (arranged so that the right side of the rotation axis comes to the front) by rotating the posture displayed in the frame 125 by 45 degrees in the same manner as described above. The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "one".

In frame 137 of (a13) of FIG. 49, large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C each display identification information "1" at the same positions as above. The retained objects 633 and 633a are displayed in a mode in which the character is viewed from the end face direction by rotating the posture displayed in the frame 125 by 45 degrees in the same manner as described above. The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "seven". After this, the enlargement rendering of the pending objects 633 and 633a is started.

In frame 143 of (a14) of FIG. 49, large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C each display identification information "3" at the same positions as above. The retained objects 633 and 633a are displayed in an enlarged manner, and are rotated 45 degrees from the posture displayed in the frame 137 as described above, so that the surface of the character can be seen obliquely (arranged so that the left side of the rotation axis is in front). It is The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "four".

In frame 149 of (a15) of FIG. 49, large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C each display identification information "5" at the same positions as above. The retained objects 633 and 633a are displayed in an enlarged manner, and are displayed in a state in which the character's surface is viewed from the front by rotating the posture displayed in the frame 143 by 45 degrees in the same manner as described above. The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "one". It should be noted that the pending objects 633 and 633a may be enlarged gradually from the frame 137 to the frame 149 each time the frame is switched. Also, at the stage of the frame 138 , it may be displayed so as to have the same size (vertical size) as the suspended objects 633 and 633 a shown in the frame 149 .

In frame 155 of (a16) of FIG. 49, large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C each display identification information "7" at the same positions as above. The suspended objects 633 and 633a stop updating from the frame 149 and maintain the display of the front view of the character's surface. The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "seven".

In the frame 161 of (a17) of FIG. 50, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C each display the identification information "9" at the same positions as above. Retained objects 633 and 633a continue to stop updating from frame 155 and maintain the display of the front view of the character's surface. The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "four".

In frame 167 of (a18) of FIG. 50, large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C each display identification information "1" at the same positions as above. Retained objects 633 and 633a are displayed in a mode in which the surface of the character is viewed obliquely (arranged so that the right side of the rotation axis comes to the front) by resuming updating from the frame 161 and rotating the posture displayed in the frame 161 by 45 degrees. ing. The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "one".

In frame 173 of (a19) of FIG. 50, large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C each display identification information "3" at the same positions as above. The retained objects 633 and 633a are displayed in a mode in which the character is viewed from the end face direction by rotating the posture displayed in the frame 167 by 45 degrees. The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "seven". In the frame 173, the enlargement rendering of the suspended objects 633 and 633a ends and returns to the original size. At that time, the size may be gradually reduced each time one frame is switched from the frame 161, or the same size (vertical size) may be maintained from the frames 161 to 172 and returned to the original size in the frame 173. You can put it back.

In frame 179 of (a20) of FIG. 50, large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C each display identification information "5" at the same positions as above. The suspended objects 633 and 633a are displayed in a manner in which the surface of the character is viewed obliquely (arranged so that the left side of the rotation axis comes to the front) by rotating the posture displayed in the frame 173 by 45 degrees, but is enlarged. never The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "four".

At the timing when the identification information of the large symbol object 610C is viewed from the front during high-speed fluctuation, the large symbol object 610C is not updated for several frames in the effect display editing process shown in FIG. 36, and then the update is resumed. It is also possible to perform a pause effect. At that time, the size of the large symbol object 610C may be enlarged in proportion to the period (the number of frames) during which the large symbol object 610C is stopped, and may be returned to the original size after the pause effect is completed. In addition, in synchronization with the large symbol object 610C, it is also possible to perform a temporary stop effect in which the identification information is not updated for several frames by the effect editing process shown in FIG.

In the second modification, the enlargement effect may not be performed on the pending object 633, and the enlargement effect may be performed only on the pending object 633a corresponding to the start memory of the special figure variation display game being executed. At this time, the rectangular frame indicating the reserved digestion area 640 may be displayed so that the reserved object 633a protrudes from the frame without performing the enlargement effect. In addition, the reserved object 633 can be displayed not only in the special figure 1 reserved display portion 660 (the reserved display portion 630a) but also in the special figure 2 reserved display portion (the reserved display portion 630b). Therefore, if there is a reserved object 633 in the special figure 2 reserved display section, the reserved object 633 may be similarly enlarged. In this case, regardless of whether the reserved object 633a was the reserved object 633 that was in the special figure 1 reserved display section and the reserved object 633 that was in the special figure 2 reserved display section, all the reserved objects 633, 633a Enlarged effect may be configured to perform In addition, if the reserved object 633a is related to the reserved object 633 that was in the special figure 1 reserved display unit, even in a configuration that performs an enlarged effect on the reserved object 633a and the reserved object displayed in the special figure 1 reserved display unit good. Similarly, if the reserved object 633a is related to the reserved object 633 that was in the special figure 2 reserved display unit, the configuration that performs the enlargement production for the reserved object 633a and the reserved object displayed in the special figure 2 reserved display unit It's okay.

[Third modification of high-speed fluctuation display]
FIG. 51 is a screen transition diagram (previous stage) showing how the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the reserved objects 633, 633a during high-speed variation display fluctuate or change (the third modification). . FIG. 52 is a screen transition diagram (second stage) showing the variation mode or change mode (third modification) of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the reserved objects 633, 633a during high-speed variation display. .

In the third modification, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B rotate and fluctuate, and the large symbol object 610C fluctuates vertically, but this structure can also be applied to low-speed fluctuation display. (e1) to (e11) in FIGS. 51 and 52 correspond to (a1) to (a11) in FIGS. 33 and 34 are the same as the transition mode shown in FIG. 34, so description thereof is omitted.

In the frame 101 shown in (e1) of FIG. 51, the large pattern object 610C is displayed in the upper central part of the display device 41 and displays the identification information "7". The large pattern object 610A displays the identification information "7" at a position on the left side of the display device 41 and at the center in the height direction, with the identification information "7" viewed from the front. The large pattern object 610B displays the identification information "7" at the right side of the display device 41 and at the center in the height direction, as viewed from the front.

In the frame 102 shown in FIG. 51(e2), the large pattern object 610C is displayed in the center of the display device 41 and displays the identification information "7". not (same hereafter).

The large pattern objects 610A and 610B are displayed in a state in which the entire object is rotated 60 degrees in the axial direction from a posture in which the identification information "7" is viewed from the front, and a figure in which the identification information "7" is viewed obliquely. is displayed. Here, the direction of rotation of the shaft is such that the left side of the rotation shaft moves to the back and the right side moves to the front, but it may rotate in the opposite direction. Note that the large pattern objects 610A and 610B have not moved in the horizontal and vertical directions compared to the frame 101 (the same applies hereinafter).

In the frame 103 shown in (e3) of FIG. 51, the large pattern object 610C is displayed in the central lower part of the display device 41 and displays the identification information "7". The large pattern objects 610A and 610B are displayed in a manner in which the entire object is rotated 120 degrees from the orientation in which the identification information "7" is viewed from the front.

In the frame 104 shown in (e4) of FIG. 51, the large pattern object 610C displaying the identification information "7" disappears, and the large pattern object 610C displaying the identification information "8" is displayed in the upper center of the display device 41. be. The large pattern objects 610A and 610B are each displayed in a state in which the back side is viewed from the front by rotating the entire object by 180 degrees from the posture in which the identification information "7" is viewed from the front, and the identification information "8" is displayed on the back side. it's shown.

In the frame 105 shown in (e5) of FIG. 51, the large pattern object 610C is displayed in the central portion of the display device 41 and displays the identification information "8". The large pattern objects 610A and 610B are each displayed in a form in which the identification information "8" is viewed from the front, and the entire object is rotated by 60 degrees. is doing.

In the frame 106 shown in (e6) of FIG. 51, the large pattern object 610C is displayed in the central lower part of the display device 41 and displays the identification information "8". Each of the large pattern objects 610A and 610B is displayed in a state in which the entire object is rotated 120 degrees from a posture in which the identification information "8" is viewed from the front, and the outer shape of the identification information "8" is horizontally reversed and viewed obliquely. A figure is displayed.

In the frame 107 shown in (e7) of FIG. 51, the large pattern object 610C displaying the identification information "8" disappears, and the large pattern object 610C displaying the identification information "9" is displayed in the upper center of the display device 41. be. The large pattern objects 610A and 610B are displayed in a state in which the entire object is rotated 180 degrees from the orientation in which the identification information "8" is viewed from the front, and the surface is viewed from the front, and the identification information "9" is displayed on the surface. is doing.

In the frame 108 shown in (e8) of FIG. 51, the large pattern object 610C is displayed in the central portion of the display device 41 and displays the identification information "9". The large pattern objects 610A and 610B are displayed in a state in which the entire object is rotated 60 degrees from a posture in which the identification information "9" is viewed from the front, and a figure is displayed in a state in which the identification information "9" is viewed obliquely. ing.

In the frame 113 shown in (e9) of FIG. 52, a large pattern object 610C displaying the identification information "2" is displayed in the upper center of the display device 41. FIG. The large pattern objects 610A and 610B are displayed with their surfaces viewed from the front, and the identification information "2" is displayed on the surfaces.

In a frame 119 shown in (e10) of FIG. 52, a large pattern object 610C displaying identification information "4" is displayed in the upper center of the display device 41. FIG. The large pattern objects 610A and 610B are displayed with their surfaces viewed from the front, and the identification information "4" is displayed on the surfaces.

In a frame 125 shown in (e11) of FIG. 52, a large pattern object 610C displaying identification information "6" is displayed in the upper central portion of the display device 41. FIG. The large pattern objects 610A and 610B are displayed with their surfaces viewed from the front, and the identification information "6" is displayed on the surfaces.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the large pattern object 610C moves in the order of upper center, center and lower center of the display device 41 while having the same identification information (same form) using three frames. is displayed. Further, in the large pattern objects 610A and 610B, the same identification information (identification information to be viewed from the front) is displayed only in one frame.

In this embodiment, it is possible to change the combination of the variation mode (variation display mode) of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C according to the game state. For example, at the start of the normal game state, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are set to the vertical scroll variation, and the large symbol object 610C is set to the rotational variation. It is also possible to change the large symbol objects 610A and 610B to rotational variation and the large symbol object 610C to vertical scroll variation when the pseudo-continuous effect occurs. In addition, in the case of pseudo continuous production, the large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) that performs the rotational variation and the large symbol object that performs vertical scroll variation (for example, It is also possible to alternately switch the variation modes of the large pattern objects 610A and 610B).

In addition, it is also possible to change the combination of variation modes according to the expectation level of the special figure variation display game being executed and the big hit of the reserved object 633a. 610B is set to vertical scroll variation, and large pattern object 610C is set to rotation variation. If the degree of expectation is "medium", the large symbol object 610A (or 610B) is set to vertical scroll variation, and the large symbol object 610C and large symbol object 610B (or large symbol object 610A) are set to rotation variation. If the degree of expectation is "high", changes such as setting the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C to rotation variation are possible.

[Actions and effects of the first embodiment]
According to the first embodiment, display control means (effect control device 300) for performing a variable display game by variably displaying a plurality of large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C on the display device 41 is provided, and the result of the variable display game is In the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when a special result is obtained, the plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C are the first large symbol objects (for example, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B ), and a second large symbol object (eg, large symbol object 610C) whose variable display mode is different from that of the first large symbol object (eg, large symbol objects 610A and 610B),
The variable display game includes a high-speed variable display period in which the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C change faster than the period immediately after the start of the variable display game. , a plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C are variably displayed, and a small symbol object 615 is variably displayed, and a second large symbol object (for example, a large symbol object 610C) is continuously displayed in the same manner during the high-speed variation display period. The period (T2) during which the first large symbol objects (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) are displayed in the same manner is set to be shorter than the period (T1) during which the small symbol objects 615 are displayed in the same manner. is set to be equal to the period (T2) of continuously displaying the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) in the same manner.

With the above configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C during the variation display game, thereby improving interest.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (production control device 300), under predetermined conditions (for example, when the production stage changes or when the pseudo-continuous production is temporarily stopped), the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610A, 610B) and the second large pattern object (for example, the large pattern object 610C) and/or the display number are exchanged.

As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced without adding a new performance element, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the first large symbol objects (eg, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) have first identification information (identification information), and the second large symbol object (eg, large symbol object 610C) has the second Equipped with identification information (identification information), the display control means (production control device 300) displays a first large symbol object (for example, a large Symbol objects 610A and 610B) are variably displayed, and a second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) is variably displayed in a variable display manner rotating at a predetermined position.

This makes it possible to easily recognize the variable display modes of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C during the variable display game even if the variable displays with different variable display modes are performed at the same time.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (rendering control device 300) displays the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) in a stage-rotated manner, and the second identification information (identification information ) is displayed so that the front side or the back side is alternately viewed from the front, and the second identification information (identification information) is switched every time the front side and / or the back side is viewed from the front. Objects (for example, large pattern object 610C) are variably displayed.

Thereby, it is possible to easily grasp the switching of the second identification information (identification information) due to the rotational fluctuation.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (production control device 300) moves the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) from the base end of the specific route toward the terminal end of the specific route and disappears. After that, the first large pattern object (for example, large pattern objects 610A and 610B) whose first identification information (identification information) has been switched is moved from the base end toward the terminal end to disappear. Scroll the first large pattern object (for example, large pattern objects 610A and 610B).

As a result, switching of the first identification information (identification information) by vertical scrolling (one-way scrolling) can be easily grasped.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (production control device 300) displays a plurality of first large symbol objects (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) along a specific route in the order in which the first identification information (identification information) is switched. While displaying side by side, a plurality of first large pattern objects (for example, large pattern objects 610A and 610B) are displayed continuously in the same manner for the same period, and a plurality of first large pattern objects (for example, large pattern objects) objects 610A, 610B).

Accordingly, it is possible to easily grasp switching of the first identification information (identification information) by vertical scrolling (one-way scrolling) in which a plurality of first identification information (identification information) are arranged at the same time.

In the first embodiment, the display time of the variable display game in the specific game state (for example, time saving state) in which the specific game can be executed after the end of the special game state is the variable display game in the normal game state in which the specific game cannot be executed. shorter than the display time of

As a result, the specific game state (for example, time-saving state) is reliably performed, and the variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C during the specific game state can be easily recognized.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with display control means (effect control device 300) for performing a variable display game by variably displaying a plurality of large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C, and the result of the variable display game is In the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when a special result is obtained, the plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C are the first large symbol objects (for example, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B ), and a second large symbol object (eg, large symbol object 610C) having a variable display mode different from that of the first large symbol object (eg, large symbol objects 610A and 610B), and display control means (effect control device 300) performs variable display of a plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C, and variable display of a small symbol object 615 on the display device 41, and performs variable display during a predetermined period (preliminary operation period, temporary stop display period) during a variable display game. ), the period during which the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) is displayed continuously in the same manner, and the first large symbol object (eg, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) are displayed continuously in the same manner. The second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C ) in the same manner is set to be shorter than the period in which the first large symbol objects (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) are continuously displayed in the same manner, and the small symbol object 615 is displayed in the same manner. , is set equal to the period during which the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) is continuously displayed in the same manner.

With the above configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C during the variation display game, and the first large symbol objects (for example, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B) and the second large symbol objects in a predetermined period of time. By equalizing the switching cycles of the identification information of the two large pattern objects (for example, the large pattern object 610C), it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a sense of incongruity in the variable display, thereby improving the interest.

In the first embodiment, the specific display period includes a high-speed variation display period in which the variation speed is faster than the predetermined period, the predetermined period includes a preliminary action display period for displaying a preliminary action at the start of the variable display game, The first large pattern objects (for example, large pattern objects 610A and 610B) have first identification information (identification information), and the second large pattern objects (for example, large pattern object 610C) have second identification information (identification information), and the display control means (rendering control device 300) specifies the first large symbol objects (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) provided on the screen of the display device 41 in the high-speed fluctuation display period. The first identification information (identification information) is variably displayed in a scrolling manner (vertical scrolling) along the path, and the second large pattern object (for example, the large pattern object 610C) is displayed in a stepwise axially rotated manner. Then, the front side and the back side on which the second identification information (identification information) is displayed are displayed so that they are alternately viewed from the front, and the second identification information (identification information) is displayed each time the front side and/or the back side is viewed from the front. information) is changed (rotational fluctuation), and in the preliminary operation display period, the first large symbol objects (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) are displayed in the first position while maintaining the first identification information (identification information). The display position of one large pattern object (for example, large pattern objects 610A, 610B) is changed from the initial position of the first large pattern object (for example, large pattern objects 610A, 610B) to the first large pattern object (for example, large pattern objects 610A, 610B). 610B) moves a predetermined distance in the direction opposite to the scrolling direction, and then returns to the initial position of the first large pattern object (for example, large pattern objects 610A and 610B). , large pattern object 610C) is changed to the second large pattern object (for example, large pattern object 610C) while maintaining the second identification information (identification information). From the initial position of the first large pattern object (for example, large pattern objects 610A and 610B) moves a predetermined distance in the direction opposite to the scrolling direction, and then the initial position of the second large pattern object (for example, large pattern object 610C) , and the first large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610A , 610B) and the second large symbol object (eg, large symbol object 610C) are moved in synchronism with each other.

Thus, even if the first large pattern object (for example, the large pattern objects 610A and 610B) and the second large pattern object (for example, the large pattern object 610C) are different in variation display mode, the same action is performed in the preliminary action. Therefore, the effect at the start of the variable display game can be performed naturally.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (production control device 300) displays the preliminary action of the first large symbol objects (eg, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) and the second large symbol object (eg, large symbol object 610C). The size in the period is made larger than the size in the high-speed fluctuation display period of the first large pattern object (for example, large pattern objects 610A and 610B) and the second large pattern object (for example, large pattern object 610C).

As a result, attention can be drawn to the preliminary movement, and the sizes of the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C in the high-speed fluctuation display are made moderately smaller than those during the preliminary fluctuation to make them easily visible. , the scrolling can be easily recognized, thereby making it possible to easily recognize the variable display of the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C. Further, by making the sizes of the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C smaller than those during the preliminary variation in the high-speed variation display, the speed of scrolling can be enhanced.

Here, even if the size of the identification information is defined as the size of the second large pattern object (for example, the large pattern object 610C), the size of the large pattern object (for example, the large pattern object 610C) is The overall size including the object body (frame, character, etc.) in which information is displayed may be defined as the size of the second large pattern object (for example, large pattern object 610C). Therefore, for example, even if the size of the identification information does not differ between the preliminary action display period and the high-speed fluctuation display period, the object body (frame, character) is displayed together with the identification information during the preliminary action display period, and the high-speed fluctuation display is performed. Even if the object body (frame, character) disappears during the period (and the slow fluctuation display period) and only the identification information is displayed, the size of the large pattern object during the preliminary action display period is larger than that during the high speed fluctuation display period. can be considered large.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) changes the second large symbol object (eg, large symbol object 610C) to the second large symbol object (eg, large symbol object) immediately after the preliminary action display period ends. A mode in which the display position of the symbol object 610C converges to the initial position of the second large symbol object (eg, the large symbol object 610C) while oscillating around the initial position of the second large symbol object (eg, the large symbol object 610C). to change the display.

Thereby, the second large pattern object (for example, the large pattern object 610C) can be physically moved.

In the first embodiment, the predetermined period includes a temporary stop display period (shaking fluctuation display period) performed after the specific display period, and the display control means (effect control device 300) controls the first large symbol during the temporary stop display period. Objects (for example, large design objects 610A, 610B) and second large design objects (for example, large design objects 610C) are displayed at the display positions of the first large design objects (for example, large design objects 610A, 610B) and the second large design. The display positions of the objects (for example, the large pattern object 610C) are synchronized with each other and variably displayed in a manner that periodically changes in the same direction.

As a result, it is possible to naturally suggest to the player that the game is temporarily stopped immediately before the end of the variable display game.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with a display control means for performing a variable display game by variably displaying a plurality of large symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C). As a result, in the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player, the starting memory is stored as the execution right of the variable display game based on the passage of the game ball into the starting area (for example, the starting prize winning port 36). A storable starting storage means (game control device 100) is provided, and a plurality of large symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) are a first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A, 610B) and a second A second large symbol object (such as a large symbol object 610C) that differs from the first large symbol object (such as the large symbol objects 610A and 610B)) is included, and the variable display game is started immediately after the start of the variable display game. Also includes a high-speed fluctuation display period in which the fluctuation speed of the large symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) is fast, and the display control means (production control device 300) causes the display device 41 to display a plurality of large symbol objects (large symbol Objects 610A, 610B, 610C) are variably displayed, small symbol object 615 is variably displayed, and pending objects 633, 633a corresponding to the starting memory are displayed. For example, a period (T2) in which the large symbol object 610C) is displayed continuously in the same manner, and a period (T1) in which the first large symbol objects (eg, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) are displayed continuously in the same manner. The period (S1) during which the small symbol object 615 is displayed continuously in the same manner is shorter than the period (T2) during which the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) is displayed continuously in the same manner. , and the period (H1) during which the reserved objects 633 and 633a are continuously displayed in the same manner is the period during which the first large symbol objects (for example, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B) are continuously displayed in the same manner ( longer than T1).

As a result, the player naturally directs his/her line of sight to the fast moving direction, so that the player's line of sight can be directed to the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C during high-speed fluctuations. Also, when the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C are stopped (including the temporarily stopped state), the line of sight can be directed to the variably displayed holding objects 633, 633a. As described above, the entertainment of the game can be improved by appropriately performing the effects of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C during the variable display game.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (rendering control device 300) variably displays the pending objects 633, 633a in such a manner that the forms of the pending objects 633, 633a change periodically, and the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C is variably displayed in such a manner that the display positions of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C change periodically during the temporary stop, and the period (P3) in which the forms of the holding objects 633 and 633a change is displayed during the temporary stop. It is made equal (synchronized) with the period of change of the display positions of the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C.

As a result, it is possible to coordinate (synchronize) the variable display period (P3) of the holding objects 633, 633a with the fluctuation period of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C at the time of temporary stop, thereby improving the interest of the game. At the same time, unnaturalness caused by asynchronism can be eliminated.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (rendering control device 300) variably displays the pending objects 633 and 633a in a manner in which the forms of the pending objects 633 and 633a change periodically, and the pending objects 633 and 633a It is possible to shorten the cycle in which the form changes when there is a high degree of expectation that the result of the variable display game related to the suspended objects 633 and 633a will be a special result.

Thereby, it is possible to visually grasp the difference in the degree of expectation of suspension related to the suspension objects 633 and 633a.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (rendering control device 300) reduces the amplitude when the forms of the pending objects 633 and 633a change as the period of change of the forms of the pending objects 633 and 633a becomes shorter.

As a result, it is possible to eliminate the unnatural relationship between the period and the amplitude in which the forms of the retained objects 633 and 633a change.

In the first embodiment, the pending objects 633, 633a include a decoration object 633b that is displayed in a manner that circulates along the outline of the pending objects 633, 633a. , 633a is defined as the period in which the decorative object 633b circulates around the external shapes of the reserved objects 633, 633a.

As a result, it is not necessary to move the bodies (characters) of the pending objects 633 and 633a in the variable display, so the variable display (variable display) of the pending objects 633 and 633a can be easily performed.

In the first embodiment, the suspended objects 633, 633a are provided with a decoration object 633b, and the display control means (rendering control device 300) rotates the suspended objects 633, 633a so that the position of the decoration object 633b rotates. The cycle of displaying and changing the form of the pending objects 633 and 633a is defined as the cycle of the decoration object 633b.

As a result, it is not necessary to move the bodies (characters) of the pending objects 633 and 633a in the variable display, so the variable display (variable display) of the pending objects 633 and 633a can be easily performed.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with display control means (effect control device 300) for performing a variable display game by variably displaying a plurality of large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C, and the result of the variable display game is In the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when a special result is obtained, the plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C are the first large symbol objects (for example, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B ), and a second large symbol object (eg, large symbol object 610C) having a variable display mode different from that of the first large symbol object (eg, large symbol objects 610A and 610B), and display control means (effect control device 300) variably displays a plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C and variably displays a small symbol object 615 on the display device 41, and displays a second large symbol object (for example, a large symbol object 610C) in a predetermined manner. The identification information included in the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) can be variably displayed in a manner of axially rotating at the position (rotational variation), and can be displayed for a predetermined period of time in a front view, The predetermined period can be changed based on the size of the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C).

This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the identification information during the variable display of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C). In this way, by appropriately performing the effects of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C during the variable display game, interest can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) changes the size of the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) based on the game state.

As a result, it is possible to suggest which game state is occurring to the player without adding a new effect element.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (rendering control device 300) determines the size of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) when the identification information is viewed from the front. It is made larger than the size of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) when it is not possible.

Thereby, the identification information displayed on the second large pattern object (for example, the large pattern object 610C) can be emphasized.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (rendering control device 300) controls the second large symbol object (eg, large symbol object 610C) after the second large symbol object (eg, large symbol object 610C) starts to rotate. ) is viewed from the front, the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) is paused for a predetermined period of time, and the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) The ratio of the predetermined period in the cycle from the start of the axis rotation to the end of the pause is changed based on the size of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C).

This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the identification information during the variable display of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C). In addition, since the cycle of the axis rotation of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) remains unchanged regardless of the predetermined period, the cycle of the axis rotation of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) Synchronization with the scroll period of the first large symbol objects (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) is facilitated, and a more natural variable display effect can be performed.

According to the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) for performing a variable display game is provided on the display device 41, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is provided. is provided with start memory means (game control device 100) capable of storing the start memory as the execution right of the variable display game based on the passage of the game ball to the start area (start winning port 36, etc.) , the display control means (rendering control device 300) displays the pending objects 633 and 633a corresponding to the starting memory on the display device 41, and rotates the pending objects 633 and 633a at a specific rotation angle (when the character is viewed from the front). or other rotation angles at which the characteristics of the character can be recognized), and the suspended objects 633, 633a It can vary based on the size of 633a.

As a result, the visibility of the image related to the specific rotation angle of the holding objects 633 and 633a (the rotation angle at which the character is viewed from the front, or other rotation angles at which the characteristics of the character can be recognized, etc.) can be improved. Further, the suspension time can be changed according to the size of the pending objects 633, 633a. Therefore, the variable display (variable display) of the pending objects 633 and 633a is not monotonous, and the player's attention can be enhanced, thereby improving interest.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) changes the size of the pending objects 633, 633a based on the game state.

As a result, it is possible to suggest which game state is occurring to the player without adding a new effect element.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) variably displays a plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C on the display device 41 to execute a variable display game, and during temporary stop, a plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C. The large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C are variably displayed in such a manner that the display positions of the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C change periodically, and the holding objects 633, 633a start rotating on the axis until the pause ends. is synchronized with the period in which the display positions of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C change during the temporary stop.

As a result, the vibration of the display positions of the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C and the rotation of the holding objects 633, 633a can be harmonized to produce a natural presentation.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (rendering control device 300) determines the ratio of the pauses in the period from when the suspended objects 633 and 633a start the axial rotation to when the pause ends. Varies based on the size of 633a.

As a result, the visibility of the image related to the specific rotation angle of the holding objects 633 and 633a (the rotation angle at which the character is viewed from the front, or other rotation angles at which the characteristics of the character can be recognized, etc.) can be improved. can be enhanced. In addition, since the rotation period including the temporary stop of the reserved objects 633, 633a is unchanged, the rotation period of the reserved objects 633, 633a and the scroll period or rotation period of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C can be easily synchronized. It becomes possible to perform a more natural production.

According to the first embodiment, display control means (effect control device 300) for performing a variable display game by variably displaying a plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C on the display device 41, and game balls at a predetermined firing cycle. and a ball launching device that shoots at a starting area (for example, a starting winning port 36) in a gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. A start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing a start memory as a right to execute a variable display game is provided based on the passage of a game ball to a game ball, and a plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C are first large symbol objects. (For example, large pattern objects 610A, 610B) and a second large pattern object (for example, large pattern object 610C) whose variable display mode is different from that of the first large pattern object (for example, large pattern object 610A, 610B) The variable display game includes a high-speed variable display period in which the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C change faster than the period immediately after the start of the variable display game, and the display control means (the effect control device 300) is a display device. 41, a plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C are variably displayed, and a small symbol object 615 is variably displayed. The form of 633a is variably displayed in a manner that changes periodically, and the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) is continuously displayed in the same manner during the high-speed fluctuation display period. Objects (for example, large pattern objects 610A and 610B) are shortened from the period of continuous display in the same manner, and the period of continuous display of small pattern objects 615 in the same manner is set to the second large pattern object (for example, The period during which the large symbol object 610C) is continuously displayed in the same manner is equal to the period during which the reserved objects 633 and 633a are continuously displayed in the same manner. ) is set to be longer than the period of continuously displaying in the same mode, and the cycle of changing the form of the retained objects 633, 633a is set longer than the game ball shooting cycle.

A game ball is shot by the ball shooting device, and the player feels it through the sound and vibration generated at that time. Therefore, with the above configuration, by making the cycle (swaying cycle P3) in which the forms of the held objects 633 and 633a change slower than the firing cycle, the player can relax and enjoy the game. can.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with display control means (effect control device 300) for performing a variable display game by variably displaying a plurality of symbol objects (for example, large symbols 610A and 610B). Symbol objects (for example, large symbols 610A (A1, A2, A3), 610B (B1, B2, B3)) in the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result is a special result. is provided with identification information and variably displayed in a variably displayed manner in which it scrolls along a specific route (vertical route) provided on the screen of the display device 41, and the variable display game is immediately after the start of the variable display game. Including a high-speed fluctuation display period in which the pattern object fluctuates faster than the period, the display control means (production control device 300) controls the pattern objects (for example, large patterns 610A (A1, A2, A3), 610B) in the high-speed fluctuation display period. A plurality of (B1, B2, B3)) are arranged along a specific route in the order in which one round of identification information is switched, and the color associated with the identification information is a different color scheme between adjacent large pattern objects. , the pattern objects related to the identification information of the round are displayed.

With the above configuration, not only the identification information but also the object body of the large pattern object (for example, large pattern 610A (A1, A2, A3), 610B (B1, B2, B3)) displaying the identification information is scrolled. The player can easily recognize that.

According to the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) for performing a variable display game is provided on the display device 41, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is provided. is provided with start memory means (game control device 100) capable of storing the start memory as the execution right of the variable display game based on the passage of the game ball to the start area (for example, the start winning port 36). , the display control means (rendering control device 300) displays the pending objects (reserved objects 633, 633a, decorative objects 633b) corresponding to the starting memory on the display device 41, and displays the pending objects (reserved objects 633, 633a, decorative objects 633b) can be variably displayed in any one of a plurality of mutually different variable modes (“rotation 1′”, “rotation 2”, “rotation 3′”, and “rotation 4′”), and a variable period of a plurality of variable modes are identical to each other.

With the above configuration, when the rotation mode (variable mode) of the reserved objects (reserved objects 633, 633a, decoration object 633b) is changed, the rotation mode (variable mode) of the reserved objects (reserved objects 633, 633a, decoration object 633b) is It is possible to arbitrarily change between a plurality of variable modes (rotation modes (“rotation 1′”, “rotation 2”, “rotation 3′”, “rotation 4′”)) according to the game state, production stage, etc. Even if there is, control for displaying the reserved objects (the reserved objects 633, 633a and the decoration object 633b) can be easily performed.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with display control means (effect control device 300) for performing a variable display game by variably displaying a plurality of symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C). In the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result is a special result, the variable display game includes a preliminary motion display period during which a preliminary motion is displayed at the start of the variable display game; A high-speed fluctuation display period in which the fluctuation speed is faster than the fluctuation speed of the period (low-speed fluctuation 1, medium-speed fluctuation) immediately after the end of the preliminary action display, and the display control means (production control device 300) controls the symbol object (large symbol The size of the objects 610A, 610B, 610C) during the preliminary motion display period is made larger than during the high-speed fluctuation display period.

With the above configuration, attention is drawn to the preliminary movement, and the size of the pattern objects (large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C) in the high-speed fluctuation display is moderately smaller than the size at the time of the preliminary fluctuation and enters the field of view. By facilitating scrolling, the user can easily recognize the scrolling, thereby making it possible to easily recognize the variable display of the symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C). In addition, by making the size of the pattern objects (large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C) smaller in the high-speed fluctuation display than in the preliminary fluctuation, the speed of scrolling can be enhanced.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with display control means (effect control device 300) for performing a variable display game by variably displaying a plurality of symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C). In the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of (1) becomes a special result, the variable display game starts from the period immediately after the start of the variable display game (low speed variation 1, medium speed variation). Also includes a high-speed fluctuation display period in which the pattern objects (large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C) fluctuate at a high speed, and the display control means (effect control device 300) performs temporary stop display or stop display at the end of the variable display game. The size of the pattern objects (including the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, and 610C) is made larger than the size of the pattern objects during the high-speed fluctuation display period.

With the above configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the temporary stop display period (shaking fluctuation display period) and the stop symbol display period, and the symbol object (large The variable display mode of the pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C) can be easily recognized.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with display control means (effect control device 300) for performing a variable display game by variably displaying a plurality of symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C). In the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, the plurality of symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) are the first symbol objects (for example, Large pattern objects 610A, 610B) and a second pattern object (for example, large pattern object 610C) having a variable display mode different from that of the first pattern object (for example, large pattern object 610A, 610B), and display control means (Effect control device 300) sets a period during which the second symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) is continuously displayed in the same manner in a predetermined period (preliminary operation period, temporary stop display period) during the variable display game. , the period during which the first symbol objects (for example, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B) are continuously displayed in the same manner, and the specific display other than the predetermined period (preparatory operation period, temporary stop display period) during the variable display game. During the period (low-speed fluctuation display period, medium-speed fluctuation display period, high-speed fluctuation display period), the period during which the second symbol object (eg, large symbol object 610C) is displayed continuously in the same manner is replaced by the first symbol object (eg, , large pattern objects 610A and 610B) in the same manner.

With the above configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the variation mode of the symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) during the variable display game, and the first symbol objects (for example, large symbol objects 610A, 610B) in a predetermined period. By equalizing the switching cycle of the identification information of the second symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C), it is possible to avoid the discomfort of the variable display, thereby improving the interest.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with display control means (effect control device 300) for performing a variable display game by variably displaying a plurality of symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C). In the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, the plurality of symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) are the first symbol objects (for example, , large pattern objects 610A and 610B) and a second pattern object (for example, large pattern object 610C) having a different variable display mode from the first pattern object (for example, large pattern object 610A and 610B), and display control Means (production control device 300) can variably display the second pattern object (for example, large pattern objects 610A and 610B) in a manner of axially rotating at a predetermined position, and the second pattern object (for example, large pattern object 610A , 610B) can be displayed for a predetermined period of time while viewed from the front, and the predetermined period of time can be changed based on the size of the second symbol objects (for example, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B). be.

Thereby, the visibility of the identification information during the variable display of the second symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) can be improved. In this way, by appropriately performing the effect of the symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) during the variable display game, the interest can be improved.

According to the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) for performing a variable display game is provided on the display device 41, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is provided. , the display control means (rendering control device 300) displays objects (reserved objects 633, 633a, large symbol object 610C (medium symbol)) on the display device 41, and displays objects (reserved object 633 , 633a, large pattern object 610C (medium pattern)) is rotated and rotated at a specific rotation angle (a rotation angle at which the character or the identification information is viewed from the front, or another rotation angle that reflects the characteristics of the character or the identification information). The object is variably displayed in such a manner that it is paused at a recognizable predetermined rotation angle, etc., and the period during which the object is paused can be changed based on the size of the object.

As a result, the object (holding objects 633, 633a, large pattern object 610C (medium pattern)) can be rotated at a specific rotation angle (a rotation angle at which the character or identification information is viewed from the front, or another rotation angle such as the character or the identification information). It is possible to improve the visibility of an image related to a predetermined rotation angle, etc., at which characteristics of information can be recognized, and to change the pause time according to the size of the object. Therefore, the variable display (variable display) of the object is not monotonous, and the player's attention can be enhanced, thereby improving interest.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with display control means (effect control device 300) for performing a variable display game by variably displaying a plurality of symbol objects (for example, large symbols 610A and 610B). Symbol objects (for example, large symbols 610A (A1, A2, A3), 610B (B1, B2, B3)) in the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result is a special result. Is provided with identification information and is variably displayed in a variable display mode that scrolls along a specific route (vertical route) provided on the screen of the display device 41, and the display control means (production control device 300) is a symbol A plurality of objects (for example, large patterns 610A (A1, A2, A3), 610B (B1, B2, B3)) are arranged along a specific route in the order in which one round of identification information switches, and the color associated with the identification information The pattern objects related to the round of the identification information are displayed so that adjacent large pattern objects have mutually different color schemes.

With the above configuration, not only the identification information but also the object body of the large pattern object (for example, large pattern 610A (A1, A2, A3), 610B (B1, B2, B3)) displaying the identification information is scrolled. The player can easily recognize that.

According to the first embodiment, the display control means (effect control device 300) for performing a variable display game is provided on the display device 41, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is provided. , the display control means (rendering control device 300) displays the objects (reserved objects 633, 633a, decoration object 633b) on the display device 41, and displays the objects (reserved objects 633, 633a, decoration object 633b), a plurality of mutually different variable modes ((“rotation 1”, “rotation 2”, “rotation 3”, “rotation 4”) or (“rotation 1′”, “rotation 2”, “rotation 3′” , "rotation 4'"))), and the variable periods of the plurality of variable modes are the same.

With the above configuration, when the rotation mode (variable mode) of the objects (reserved objects 633, 633a, decorative object 633b) is changed, the rotation mode (variable mode) of the objects (reserved objects 633, 633a, decorative object 633b) can be changed in a plurality of ways. Variable mode (rotation mode ((“rotation 1”, “rotation 2”, “rotation 3”, “rotation 4”) or (“rotation 1′”, “rotation 2”, “rotation 3′”, “rotation 4′ ))) can be easily controlled to display the objects (reserved objects 633, 633a, decoration object 633b) even when the display is arbitrarily changed according to the game state, production stage, etc. can.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with display control means (effect control device 300) for performing a variable display game by variably displaying a plurality of symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C). In the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result is a special result, the display control means (production control device 300) controls the pattern objects (large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C). The size in the preliminary operation display period is made larger than the size in the display period after the preliminary operation display period (for example, the high-speed fluctuation display period).

With the above configuration, attention is drawn to the preliminary action, and the size of the symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) is reduced in the variable display (for example, high-speed variable display) during the display period after the preliminary motion display period. By making the size moderately smaller than the size at the time of fluctuation to make it easier to see, the scrolling can be easily recognized, so that the fluctuation display of the pattern objects (large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C) can be easily recognized. . Further, in the variable display (for example, high-speed variable display) in the display period after the preliminary operation display period, the size of the symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) is made smaller than the size during the preliminary variation, thereby speeding up the scrolling. can heighten your senses.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with display control means (effect control device 300) for performing a variable display game by variably displaying a plurality of symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C). In the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of is a special result, the display control means (the effect control device 300) performs temporary stop display or stop display at the end of the variable display game. The size of the symbol objects (including the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C) to be displayed is made larger than the size of the symbol objects in the specific display period (low-speed fluctuation display period, medium-speed fluctuation display period, high-speed fluctuation display period). do.

With the above configuration, it is possible to increase the attention to the temporary stop display period (shake fluctuation display period) and the stop symbol display period, and stop from the fluctuation display (low speed fluctuation display, medium speed fluctuation display, high speed fluctuation display) in the specific display period It is possible to easily recognize the variable display mode of the symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) that shift to the symbol display period (including the temporary stop display period).

[Second embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 64. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment. In addition, in the following embodiment, the same reference numerals are used for the configuration having the same function as in the first embodiment, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate.

[Reflection on the glass frame before and after moving the production button]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining a region where the effect button 25 is reflected in the glass frame 15 before and after the effect button 25 according to the second embodiment is moved, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a region where the player can visually recognize a virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected behind the glass frame 15 before and after the movement; 53 and 54 are schematic cross-sectional side views of a cross section including one life nail 36b (described later) viewed in the lateral direction (left-right direction).

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, a game area 32 is provided between the glass frame 15 and the game board main body 30a of the game board 30. As shown in FIG. In the game area 32, for example, a start winning opening 36 attached to the game board main body 30a and a life nail 36b attached substantially above the starting winning opening 36 are arranged. The life nail 36b is a game ball that has fallen from the stage part 40b after rolling on the stage part 40b (see FIG. 2), or a windmill or road nail (between the start winning opening 36 and the windmill) placed in the game area 32. It is a nail (obstacle nail, obstacle member, guide member) that guides the game ball that has flowed down toward the starting winning opening 36 to the starting winning opening 36 by a line of obstacle nails). Normally, there are two life nails 36b, and the starting winning opening 36 is positioned just below the gap between the two life nails 36b. 53 and 54, etc., only one dead nail 36b is shown because the two dead nails 36b are superimposed on each other in the drawings viewed from the lateral direction (left and right direction).

A plurality of LEDs 25c (for example, 3) are arranged inside the effect button 25 provided in the upper center of the upper plate unit (see FIG. 1) so as to be capable of emitting light according to the progress of the game. It is configured as part of the decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4). The LED 25c may be a full-color LED or a single-color LED, but a full-color LED is desirable so as to enable various light emission modes. Also, the effect button 25 is arranged so as to be movable near the upper center of the upper plate unit. For example, the effect button 25 may have a sliding member fitted in a groove-shaped member extending substantially in the front-rear direction, and may move (slid) substantially in the front-rear direction along the groove-shaped member. An elastic member such as a spring may be attached to the effect button 25, and the effect button 25 may be configured to be held at the initial position (normal position) by the elastic member unless a force is applied.

Then, for example, when the LED 25c emits light, the light from the effect button 25 is emitted as direct light toward the surroundings including the eyes of the player.

On the other hand, part of the light from the effect button 25 emitted to the glass frame 15 (here, the cover glass 14) is reflected by the glass frame 15, and is reflected forward (toward the player side). Become. Note that this embodiment mainly deals with reflection by the cover glass 14 (transparent member) held by the glass frame 15 (transparent member holding frame). In addition to the cover glass 14, an acrylic plate or the like can also be used as the transparent member. The cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15 is configured as a transparent member through which the game board 30 can be seen by the player.

Light from the performance button 25 is reflected at various positions on the glass frame 15. - 特許庁In addition, the intensity (reflectance) of the reflected light depends on the incident angle from the effect button 25, and tends to gradually increase as the incident angle decreases. In this embodiment, the incident angle is defined as the angle between the incident direction and the surface (reflective surface) of the cover glass 14 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 53, for example, when the effect button 25 is positioned at the initial position, the player pushes the life nail 36b from the area A above the front of the glass frame 15 (on the side of the player's face or head). A description will be given of the reflection of the effect button 25 when viewing the .

When the player visually recognizes the life nail 36b from the area A, the virtual image (initial position (virtual image)) of the effect button 25 positioned at the initial position appears to overlap the life nail 36b, as indicated by the dashed line in FIG. A virtual image is formed in the glass frame 15 (cover glass 14) at a position where the reflected light directed toward the area A of the reflected light emitted from the effect button 25 and reflected by the glass frame 15 (cover glass 14) overlaps the life nail 36b. It's for the sake of being reflected. The virtual image of the effect button 25 is projected more vividly (firmly and clearly) as the light emission of the LED 25c of the effect button 25 becomes stronger.

The virtual image of the effect button 25 is not limited to the case where the LED 25c of the effect button 25 emits light. Even in the case of being closed, it can be reflected in the glass frame 15 .

Further, as described above, when the incident angle (the angle between the incident direction and the surface of the cover glass 14) of the light emitted from the effect button 25 at the initial position with respect to the glass frame 15 is small, the intensity of the reflected light becomes strong. There is a strong tendency for the virtual image of the effect button 25 to be clearly reflected in the glass frame 15 at the position overlapping with 36b.

53 and 54, when the effect button 25 is pulled out forward (toward the side of the player), the effect button 25 is released as shown by the thick solid line in FIG. As the incident angle of the reflected light with respect to the glass frame 15 increases, the intensity of the reflected light attenuated goes toward the area B in front and slightly above the glass frame 15 (on the player's chest side).

As a result, when the player visually recognizes the life nail 36b from the area A in front and above the glass frame 15 (on the side of the player's face or head), the virtual image of the effect button 25 can be prevented from overlapping the life nail 36b. Since the visibility of the nail 36b is improved, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, if the player visually recognizes the life nail 36b from the area B (the chest side of the player), as indicated by the broken line in FIG. appears to overlap with the life nail 36b. However, since the intensity of the reflected light is attenuated as the incident angle increases, even if the player visually recognizes the life nail 36b from the area B, the deterioration of the visibility of the life nail 36b is suppressed. be able to. The player's eyes are normally in the area A, but may move to the area B if the player forcibly breaks his/her posture.

The movement of the effect button 25 can be performed manually by the player or by the control of the effect control device 300 . For example, the effect control device 300 can move the effect button 25 according to a predetermined condition (for example, when starting hitting to the right or returning from hitting to the left from hitting to the right) or according to the player's operation. It should be noted that the player may manually move the effect button 25 . Also, for example, in the normal game state, the left-handed hit is advantageous, so it returns from the right-handed hit to the left-handed state. Therefore, it becomes a right-handed state.

53 and 54, when viewed from area A, the virtual image (initial position (virtual image)) of the production button 25 is moved to avoid overlapping with the life nail 36b. , the effect button 25 may be moved in order to avoid overlapping with the start winning opening 36. - 特許庁

Furthermore, not only when the virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected in the glass frame 15 overlaps the life nail 36b or the start winning opening 36, but also various board elements attached to the game board 30 (components or components of the game board 30) , second gaming machine component), the effect button 25 may be moved. For example, board elements that can overlap with the virtual image of the effect button 25 include obstacle nails other than the life nail 36b, the stage part 40b, the warp passage 40e, the normal figure start gate 34, the special variable prize winning device 39, the normal Variable winning device (second start winning port) 37, display screen of display device 41, LED of board decoration device 46, LED of collective display device 50 (especially LED indicating pattern, hold, right-handed state), left-handed Target position (target position, hit position, position where the game ball lands when hitting left), LED of the lamp display device 80, and the like. In addition, on the board surface of the game board 30 (for example, the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the game area 32, the vicinity of the operation handle 24, the left side of the out port 30b, etc.), "unauthorized monitoring (mounting of magnetic / radio wave sensor, etc.)" and "spec When displaying information, suggestions, and alerts to players and hall clerks such as "display (display of probability of big hit and number of prize balls)" and "prevention of immersion", a virtual image of the production button 25 is displayed on the display part. The effect control device 300 can control the movement of the effect button 25 so as not to get stuck. In addition, even when the display screen of the display device 41 displays information, suggestions, and calls for attention to players and hall clerks, the effect control device 300 prevents the virtual image of the effect button 25 from appearing in the display on the display screen. Thus, the movement of the production button 25 can be controlled.

In addition, the object of the virtual image reflected in the glass frame 15 so as to overlap with the life nail 36b etc. is not limited to the production button 25, but is installed in the projecting production unit 13 on the side of the frame, the upper part of the frame, the speaker 19, the upper plate unit, etc. Various frame elements (first gaming machine components) such as the LEDs and sub-liquid crystals of the frame decoration device 18 are also objects of the virtual image reflected in the glass frame 15 . In this embodiment, the frame element is a component or component of the opening/closing frame including the glass frame 15 .

Further, a virtual image such as the effect button 25 is reflected not only on the glass frame 15 but also on glossy members such as the surface of the game board 30 and the surfaces of various decorative members. The surface of the game board 30 and the surfaces of various decorative members are, for example, metal-plated, film-coated, or made of a resin material, and can reflect light from the effect buttons 25 and the like. Further, for example, when the light guide plate is attached in front of the game board 30, the virtual image of the effect button 25 and the like can be reflected on the light guide plate as well.

In addition, the effect control device 300 may be controlled so that the light emission intensity when the effect button 25 is at the initial position is lower than the light emission intensity when the effect button 25 is operated (or during operation) (initial Emission intensity at position<emission intensity after movement (or during operation). In this way, by suppressing the luminous intensity when the effect button 25 is at the initial position, it is possible to reduce visibility degradation due to glare. Further, when the player manually moves the production button 25, the player can freely move the production button 25 according to the condition of the reflection, and the operation surface of the production button 25 can be changed by the player. (light emitted from the LED reaches the player directly), so that it is easy to observe the light emission mode such as rainbow color and red color. Therefore, when an operation suggesting image of the effect button 25 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 when the effect button 25 is operated, the player observes the effect button 25 that shines in the same color or light emission mode as the operation suggesting image, for example. It becomes easy to use, and operability and decorativeness can be improved.

Also, the light emission intensity when the effect button 25 returns to the initial position may be reversed from the above case, or the light emission intensity after the movement may be maintained (the light emission intensity when returning to the initial position≧the light emission intensity after the movement). (or during operation). In particular, when the performance button 25 is operated when a big win is announced, the player tends to lose attention to the starting prize-winning opening 36 as the big-winning prize opening of the special variable prize winning device 39 is opened. Therefore, even if the visibility is lowered due to the reflection, the effect is reduced. Therefore, the effect control device 300 controls the light emission intensity of the effect button 25 so as to increase the decorativeness, so that the fanfare effect, the round effect, etc. It is possible to enhance the performance effect of.

[Specific example of a mode in which the effect button is reflected in the glass frame]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a specific example of a mode in which the production button 25 according to the second embodiment is reflected on the glass frame 15 (here, the cover glass 14) will be described. FIG. 55 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram for explaining the flow of light rays from the effect button 25 that enters the field of view of the player.

In FIG. 55, the luminous mode of the effect button 25 is displayed in black so that the reflection in the glass frame 15 is easy to understand.

When the LED 25c of the production button 25 emits light, the player's eyes receive direct light from the production button 25 indicated by the solid line arrow in FIG. 55 and reflected light reflected by the glass frame 15 indicated by the broken line arrow.

The player can visually recognize the virtual image of the performance button 25 reflected in the glass frame 15 by reflecting light into the player's eyes. Therefore, the virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected in the glass frame 15 appears to overlap with board elements such as the life nail 36b attached to the game board 30 behind the glass frame 15. Visibility is likely to deteriorate.

Therefore, the effect control device 300 can weaken the emission intensity of the LED 25c of the effect button 25 under predetermined conditions (for example, when starting hitting to the right and returning to hitting to the left). In addition, the production|presentation control apparatus 300 may make LED25c of the production|presentation button 25 light-extinguish.

According to this aspect, the virtual image of the production button 25 reflected in the glass frame 15 can be made thinner, so that when the player looks at the board element, the virtual image of the production button 25 appears to overlap the board element. Even in such a case, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the visibility of the board element.

[Modified example of reflection on the glass frame before and after moving the effect button]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining a region where the effect button 25 is reflected in the glass frame 15 before and after the movement of the effect button 25 in the modification according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 57 is a modification according to the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an area where a player can visually recognize a virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected in the back of the glass frame 15 before and after the example effect button 25 is moved; It should be noted that in the drawings below, descriptions of the same configurations as those of the effect button 25 and the like in FIGS. 53 and 54 will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in this modification, the effect button 25 can be moved, for example, from the initial position so that the upper part thereof is tilted toward the player.

Therefore, when the effect button 25 is tilted obliquely as shown in the positions after movement in FIGS. It goes into the glass frame 15 at the position overlapping with the nail 36b.

The incident angle of the light emitted from the production button 25 after the movement with respect to the glass frame 15 is smaller than that at the initial position. The amount (intensity) of light directed to the rear of the glass frame 15, that is, the glass frame 15, decreases (becomes weaker). In addition, corresponding to the decrease in the incident angle, the direction of the reflected light reflected by the glass frame 15 also becomes closer to the glass frame 15, and goes toward the region B above the player's head.

As a result, when the player visually recognizes the life nail 36b from the area A in front and above the glass frame 15 (on the side of the player's face or head), the virtual image of the effect button 25 can be prevented from overlapping the life nail 36b. Since the visibility of the nail 36b is improved, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, if the player visually recognizes the life nail 36b from the area B (above the normal position of the player's head), as shown in FIG. A virtual image (after movement (virtual image)) of the tilted effect button 25 appears to overlap the life nail 36b. However, since the area B is located above the normal position of the player's head, the virtual image of the life nail 36b and the effect button 25 cannot be seen unless the player dares to look into the glass frame 15 from above, for example, by standing up. are not seen overlapping each other, and it is possible to avoid deterioration of the visibility of the life nail 36b in a normal seated state.

Also, the game machine 10 is provided with a decoration device 18a projecting forward from the upper center of the glass frame 15 (see FIG. 1). Therefore, by locating the region B inside the decoration device 18a, the head of the player who tries to look in comes into contact with the decoration device 18a, the glass frame 15, etc., and cannot be seen unless he takes an unreasonable posture. , the virtual image of the performance button 25 can be substantially made invisible. By positioning the area B inside the decoration device 18a, the light emission of the production button 25 is reflected, so that the decorativeness of the decoration device 18a can be improved.

Furthermore, since the amount of light directed toward the glass frame 15 is reduced by the forward inclination of the effect button 25, even if the player visually recognizes the life nail 26b from the area B, the visibility of the life nail 36b is deteriorated. can be suppressed.

[Mode of movement of effect button in second modification]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the movement mode of the effect button 25 of the second modified example according to the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 58(A), the effect button 25 of the second modification includes a lever portion (lever stick, joystick). In addition, LED25c (illustration omitted) which can emit light is arrange|positioned at the grip part 25d.

As shown in FIG. 58B, the shaft portion 25e can tilt forward, backward, left and right while supporting the grip portion 25d. It is acceptable.

It should be noted that the grip portion 25d and the shaft portion 25e may be configured to be movable downward, and a push input operation of pressing the effect button 25 from above toward the upper tray unit may be accepted.

By configuring the effect button 25 in this way, it is possible to move the LED 25c of the grip portion 25d and change the light emitting direction (angle). Therefore, similarly to the case where the production button 25 in FIG. 56 and FIG. 57 is tilted aslant, the production button 25 of the second modification can improve the visibility of the life nail 36b. Interest can be improved.

[Movement mode of effect button in the third modification]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the movement mode of the effect button 25 of the third modified example according to the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 59(A), the effect button 25 of the third modification is configured as a lever portion including a grip portion 25d and a shaft portion 25e, and can move left and right on the upper tray unit. An escape groove is formed in the upper plate unit so that the performance button 25 can move left and right.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59(B), the performance button 25 can be moved left and right along the escape groove of the upper tray unit. In the example of FIG. 59(B), the effect button 25 has moved to the left of the upper tray unit.

By constructing the effect button 25 in this way, the effect button 25 can be moved to a position not overlapping the life nail 36b, thereby improving the visibility of the life nail 36b, thereby improving the interest of the game. can.

[Fourth modified example of reflection in the glass frame of the production button]
FIG. 60 shows an area in which the effect button 25 of the fourth modification according to the second embodiment is reflected in the glass frame 15 and an area in which the player can visually recognize the virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected in the back of the glass frame 15. It is a figure explaining.

As shown in FIG. 60, in this modified example, the case where the stage portion 40b and the virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected in the glass frame 15 appear to overlap will be described.

The stage portion 40b has an LED or the like (not shown) capable of emitting light, and is configured to be capable of emitting light according to the effect, game state, or the like. The distance from the player-side end of each board member (stage portion 40b, life nail 36b, starting prize opening 36) to the cover glass 14 becomes shorter in the order of the stage portion 40b, the start winning prize opening 36, and the life nail 36b ( Stage portion 40b>starting prize opening 36>life nail 36b (see FIG. 60)). The distance from the end of each board member to the cover glass 14 may be shortened in the order of the stage portion 40b, the life nail 36b, and the starting prize opening 36 (stage portion 40b>life nail 36b>start prize opening 36). .

In addition, the effect button 25 has an LED 25c and is configured to be capable of emitting light. Part of the light emitted from the effect button 25 to the glass frame 15 is reflected by the glass frame 15, ) becomes reflected light. When the player visually recognizes the stage portion 40b from the area A, the virtual image of the effect button 25 (effect button (virtual image)) appears to overlap the stage portion 40b as indicated by the dashed line in FIG.

Here, when the luminous intensity of the stage portion 40b is equal to or higher than the luminous intensity of the effect button 25, even if the virtual image of the effect button 25 is reflected in the glass frame 15 so as to overlap with the stage portion 40b, the player cannot see the stage portion. 40b is relatively easy to visually recognize. Therefore, even if the effect button 25 emits light, the player can easily follow the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage part 40b and enjoy the game, thereby improving the interest of the game. can.

On the other hand, when the luminescence intensity of the stage portion 40b is less than the luminescence intensity of the effect button 25, when the virtual image of the effect button 25 is reflected in the glass frame 15 so as to overlap with the stage portion 40b, the stage portion 40b is visible. sexuality worsens.

Therefore, the effect control device 300, when a predetermined condition (for example, when returning from right-handed to left-handed due to a change in the game state or when the number of reservations is reduced to 2 or less), the emission intensity of the LED25c of the production button 25 By weakening, it is possible to suppress the reflection of the virtual image of the effect button 25 on the glass frame 15.例文帳に追加As a result, deterioration of the visibility of the stage portion 40b can be suppressed, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, the production|presentation control apparatus 300 may make LED25c of the production|presentation button 25 light-extinguish.

In addition, since the light intensity of the stage portion 40b is stronger than that of the effect button 25, even if the light intensity of the effect button 25 is small, the light from the stage portion 40b, which has a large amount of light, can be reflected by the effect button 25. , the light emission of the production button 25 can be supplemented. As a result, the light from the stage portion 40b can be used as a supplement to illuminate the effect button 25 while suppressing the intensity of light emitted from the effect button 25, so that the light from the effect button 25 reflected by the glass frame 15 can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the virtual image of the effect button 25 from being reflected in the glass frame 15 and the visibility of the stage part 40b to be deteriorated.

[Protruding production unit]
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the structure of the projecting effect unit 13 of the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a cross-sectional view of the projection effect unit 13 of the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment. On the right side of the glass frame 15, a protruding effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and protrudes forward (toward the player) is arranged. The projecting effect unit 13 is a effect device capable of executing a light emitting effect or the like according to the progress of the game.

An outer lens member 13a is arranged on a projecting surface on the right side of the projecting effect unit 13 (outside of the gaming machine 1). A model character is drawn on the surface of the outer lens member 13a so as to be visible to a player who passes from the right side to the left side of the gaming machine 1, for example. It should be noted that the name of the game machine maker or the name of the game machine may be drawn.

Inside the protruding effect unit 13, a side light emitting board 13d having a plurality of outer LEDs 13b (for example, 6 pieces) and inner LEDs 13c (for example, 14 pieces) is arranged substantially parallel to the game board 30, and is frame-decorated. It is constructed as part of the device 18 (see FIG. 4). The outer LED 13b and the inner LED 13c are arranged on the side light emitting substrate 13d, but may be arranged separately. Further, the outer LED 13b may be an LED panel arranged substantially parallel to the outer lens member 13a.

An outer lens member 13a, a light guide plate 13e, a side base member 13f, and an inner lens member 13g are provided in order from the outside in front of the side light emitting substrate 13d, and a cover member 13h is further provided to cover the periphery of these members. Be prepared.

The light guide plate 13e is arranged substantially perpendicularly in front of the outer LEDs 13b of the side light emitting substrate 13d, and diffuses the light from the outer LEDs 13b taken in from the rear end surface to uniformly emit light from the outer lens member 13a. can be illuminated with a constant illuminance.

The side base member 13f is arranged on the left side of the light guide plate 13e, and the light guide plate 13e is fitted on the adjacent surface. Also, the side base member 13f is integrated with the inner lens member 13g. The side base member 13f functions as a reflector that refracts forward light from the inner LED 13c and changes it to leftward light. illuminated.

[Concrete example of a mode in which the projecting production unit is reflected in the glass frame]
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, a specific example of a mode in which the production button 25 according to the second embodiment is reflected on the glass frame 15 (here, the cover glass 14) will be described. FIG. 62 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram for explaining the flow of light rays from the projecting effect unit 13 that enters the field of view of the player. In FIG. 62, the mode in which the projecting effect unit 13 emits light is displayed in black.

When the projecting effect unit 13 emits light, the player's eyes see direct light from the projecting effect unit 13 indicated by the solid line arrow in FIG. 62 and reflected light reflected by the glass frame 15 (cover glass 14) indicated by the broken line arrow. enters.

The player visually recognizes the virtual image of the projecting effect unit 13 reflected in the glass frame 15 by the reflected light entering the player's eyes. Therefore, the virtual image of the projecting effect unit 13 reflected in the glass frame 15 appears to overlap board elements such as the life nail 36b in the glass frame 15, and visibility of the board elements tends to deteriorate.

Therefore, the effect control device 300 can weaken the emission intensity of the inner LED 13c of the protruding effect unit 13 under predetermined conditions (for example, when starting hitting to the right and returning to hitting to the left). In addition, the production|presentation control apparatus 300 may make LED13c for inside of the protrusion production|presentation unit 13 light-extinguish.

According to this aspect, the virtual image of the protruding effect unit 13 reflected in the glass frame 15 can be made thinner, so that when the player looks at the board element, the virtual image of the protruding effect unit 13 overlaps with the board element. It is possible to prevent the visibility of the board element from being deteriorated even when the board element is visible.

Further, as indicated by the dashed arrow in FIG. 62, part of the light from the projection effect unit 13 is reflected by the effect button 25 so that it enters the player's field of view, thereby assisting the light emission of the effect button 25. may In this way, by using the reflected light of the projecting production unit 13 in the production button 25, it is possible to suppress the virtual image of the production button 25 from being reflected in the glass frame 15 by weakening the light emission of the LED 25c. deterioration of visibility can be suppressed.

[Concrete example of a mode in which the projecting production unit is reflected in the glass frame]
FIG. 63 is a perspective view of the game board 30 according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram for explaining the flow of light rays from the stage portion 40b and the start winning opening 36 which are within the field of view of the player.

As shown in FIG. 63, the starting prize-winning port 36 can be provided with an LED capable of emitting light according to the effect, game state, prize-winning, etc., in the same manner as the stage section 40b.

In addition, the game board 30 is configured as a part of the upper effect unit 40c or the side effect unit 40d, and the rear side of the cover glass 14 (back side, game board) from the initial position accommodated in the game board 30 according to the effect. 30 side) and substantially in front of the display device 41, a movable accessory 40f is attached. The movable accessory 40f has a reflecting member (which may be metal-plated) capable of reflecting light incident from below forward (toward the player side). The reflecting member may be slanted, for example, facing forward and downward in order to facilitate forward reflection of light incident from below.

Here, the light emitted from the LEDs of the stage portion 40b and the start winning opening 36 not only directly enters the player's eyes, but also can illuminate the surroundings of the game board 30 as shown in FIG.

For example, the light from the stage portion 40b and the start winning opening 36 is reflected by the surface of the effect button 25 and reaches the eyes of the player. Therefore, the luminous effect of the effect button 25 can be effectively performed while suppressing the luminous intensity of the effect button 25 and suppressing the reflection of the virtual image of the effect button 25 on the glass frame 15.例文帳に追加

Also, the light from the stage part 40b and the starting prize opening 36 is reflected by the reflecting member of the movable accessory 40f that moves behind the cover glass 14 and substantially in front of the display device 41, and becomes reflected light that reaches the eyes of the player. can also Therefore, even if the movable accessory 40f does not have an LED, it is possible to produce an effect in which the movable accessory 40f looks like it emits light. can improve the interest of

In the above description, the virtual image of the frame element (constituent member of the glass frame 15) reflected in the glass frame 15 (cover glass 14) is prevented from overlapping the board element, thereby degrading the visibility of the board element. restrained.

However, it is also possible to increase the presentation effect by intentionally overlapping the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the glass frame 15 with the board element. For example, the effect control device 300 emits light from a decorative member provided on the right side of the game board 30 such as the protruding effect unit 13 when striking to the right, and by reflecting a virtual image of the decorative member on the right side of the game area 32, the game is played. You can make a right-handed suggestion to a player. At that time, the effect control device 300, for example, when causing the projecting effect unit 13 and the like (frame element) to emit light in rainbow color, also causes the body portion (board element) of the side effect unit 40d to emit light in rainbow color, synergically. A mode may be adopted in which the effect makes it easier for the player to understand the suggestion to hit to the right.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, for example, when causing the projecting effect unit 13 and the like (frame element) to emit yellow light, also sets the body part (board element) of the side effect unit 40d to blue, which is a complementary color to yellow. The white light may be seen to be inconspicuous by emitting light to reduce the apparent glare of the light emission when suggesting the player to hit right.

Further, the effect control device 300 may cause the body portion (board element) of the side effect unit 40d to emit green light at the same time when the protruding effect unit 13 and the like (frame element) emit red light. In this way, the light emitted by the frame element (red), which is different from the color of the board element (red), is reflected and superimposed (red + green) on the light emitted by the board element (green). It is also possible to create an area that looks yellow by changing the color of the board element and the frame element, thereby improving the decorativeness of the panel element and the frame element.

In addition, the effect control device 300 moves the effect button 25 from the position after movement such as FIG. By doing so, the virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected in the glass frame 15 may be deliberately overlapped with the board elements such as the life nail 36b. According to this aspect, the virtual image of the frame element such as the effect button 25 reflected in the glass frame 15 overlaps with the board element such as the life nail 36b, and the board element becomes brighter in a manner different from the usual, so that it is unexpected. occurs, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, when the player finishes hitting to the right (when returning to hitting to the left), a virtual image of the decoration member is reflected on the left side of the game area 32, so that the player can be suggested to hit to the left. Furthermore, the opening and closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 that opens the big winning opening, the specific area 86 (V winning opening), the normal figure start gate 34 (pounding gate), etc. are made to reflect the virtual image of the decorative member, You may suggest a game to According to this aspect, it is possible to perform an optical presentation using reflected light even on a member such as the opening/closing door 39c where it is difficult to attach the LED, so that the decorativeness can be easily and inexpensively enhanced, and the game can be played. can improve the interest of

Note that the effect control device 300 can increase the effect by intentionally overlapping the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the glass frame 15 with the board element. When displaying information, suggestions, or alerts such as "Illegal monitoring (equipped with magnetic / radio wave sensors, etc.)", "Specification display (display of the probability of big hits and number of prize balls)", and "Prevention of addiction", this is the limit. Instead, the position of the frame element can be controlled so that the virtual image of the frame element (effect button 25, etc.) does not appear in the display portion.

[Example of timing chart when executing a variable display game]
FIG. 64 is an example of a timing chart when the effect control device 300 according to the second embodiment executes the variation display game (decoration special figure variation display game).

When the variable display game is executed at the time (A) in FIG. 64, the display screen of the display device 41 displays the decorative special symbols (the first decorative symbols A to C, the large symbols) and the second decorative symbols (the small symbols). is displayed.

Before and after time (A), that is, before and after the start of the variable display game, the effect control device 300 reduces the light emission intensity of the LEDs of the board decoration device 46 as a board element and the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 as a frame element. I have to. Therefore, the game board 30 and its surroundings are illuminated relatively weakly by the board element and the frame element.

At time (B), the effect control device 300 executes the effect 1 on the display screen of the display device 41 . Effect 1 is the first effect of effects composed of a plurality of continuous single effects (for example, effects 1 to 3) such as pseudo-continuous effects and step-up notices.

Here, the pseudo-continuous effect is a pseudo-variation (single effect, Sub-effect, sub-variation) is performed continuously for a predetermined number of times.

It should be noted that, during the pseudo-stop display, the pseudo-continuous symbols suggesting the pseudo-continuous effect may be stop-displayed. In addition, the pseudo-continuous effect is such that the pseudo-variation is continuously performed a predetermined number of times ( Multiple times) may be produced to make it look like it is being executed. At that time, even if the temporary stop display is not performed, the effect control device 300 displays a display such as "NEXT" on the display screen of the display device 41, thereby effecting a transition to the next pseudo-fluctuation. can be executed.

The step-up notice is an effect in which a single effect (secondary effect) set in multiple stages is sequentially executed from a lower stage (step) to a predetermined stage (step).

The pseudo-continuous performance and the step-up notice are composed of a plurality of continuous single performances, and the more the plurality of times, the higher the expectation of a big win.

Also, at time (B), the effect control device 300 changes the light emission intensity of the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) from weak to strong in accordance with the effect 1 . Therefore, the virtual image of the frame element such as the production button 25 is strongly reflected in the glass frame 15 and clearly overlaps with the board element such as the life nail 36b. Thus, the effect control device 300 can emphasize that the effect is executed by clearly reflecting the virtual image of the frame element in the initial stage (effect 1) of the effect in the variable display game.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300 maintains the light emission intensity of the board decoration device 46 (board element) at low level.

At time (C), when the effect 1 ends, the effect control device 300 changes the light emission intensity of the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) from strong to weak. Therefore, the reflection of the virtual image of the frame element into the glass frame 15 is reduced, and the visibility of the board element such as the life nail 36b is improved. It should be noted that if the effect 1 is a pseudo-variation, here, the decorative special pattern on the display screen of the display device 41 is displayed in a pseudo-stop manner.

Therefore, after the middle stage of the effect (after effect 1) in the variable display game, in which the player is highly likely to carefully determine whether or not the starting memory accumulates to the upper limit (for example, 4), the frame element emits light. Since the visibility of the board element is improved by weakening, the player who is considering the stopping shot can easily observe the game ball entering the starting prize winning port 36 and the game ball rolling on the stage part 40b above it. Since the game can be played efficiently, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, since the visibility of the display screen of the display device 41 behind the cover glass 14 is also improved, it becomes easier for the player to see the reserved display of the display screen and the effect itself, and the interest in the game can be improved. When changing the emission intensity of the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) from strong to weak, even if the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) is moved from the initial position so that the reflection of the virtual image does not overlap. good.

Next, at time (D) when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the end of the production 1, the production control device 300 extinguishes the frame decoration device 18 (frame element). Therefore, since the visibility of the board element, the game ball, and the display screen of the display device 41 becomes higher after the middle stage of the effect in the variable display game, the interest in the game can be improved.

At time (E), the effect control device 300 executes the effect 2 following the effect 1 on the display screen of the display device 41 . Effect 2 is the second effect of effects composed of a plurality of continuous single effects (eg, effects 1 to 3). In addition, the effect control device 300 can perform the pseudo-variation of the effect 2 so as to have the same pseudo-variation time (suggestive effect, advance notice effect time) as the effect 1.

Also, at time (E), the effect control device 300 weakly changes the light emission intensity of the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) that has been in the off state in accordance with the effect 2 . Therefore, the game board 30 and its surroundings are brightly illuminated in accordance with the execution of the performance 2 compared to the case where the frame element is in the off state, so that the performance of the performance 2 can be emphasized. Since the luminescence intensity of the frame element is low, the virtual image of the frame element is not reflected in the glass frame 15 more than necessary, and the execution of the effect 2 can be emphasized.

After that, when the production 2 ends, the production control device 300 turns off the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) again.

Also, the effect control device 300 executes the effect 3 as the third effect of the effect composed of a plurality of single effects on the display screen of the display device 41 . The production control device 300 weakly changes the luminous intensity of the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) that has been in the off state in accordance with the execution of the production 3 . Therefore, similarly to the production 2, the production control device 300 can emphasize the execution of the production 3 without excessively reflecting the virtual image of the frame element in the glass frame 15. - 特許庁

Subsequently, when the production 3 ends at time (F), the production control device 300 turns off the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) and also turns off the board decoration device 46 (board element) (flashing light off). Therefore, the game board 30 and its surroundings are temporarily darkened. In this way, the effect control device 300 turns off the light before executing the SP ready-to-win effect, which will be described later, so that the game board 30 and its surroundings are temporarily darkened, and the mode is different from the normal effect, resulting in unexpectedness. is generated, it is possible to arouse the player's sense of expectation and improve the amusement of the game.

At time (G), the effect control device 300 executes the SP reach effect on the display screen of the display device 41 . At that time, the effect control device 300 increases the luminous intensity of the board decoration device 46 (board element) and the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) which were in the off state. Therefore, since the game board 30 and its surroundings are brightly illuminated, execution of the SP ready-to-win effect can be emphasized.

At time (G), the luminous intensity of the frame element increases, and the reflection of the virtual image of the frame element in the glass frame 15 becomes intense. Brightness can be emphasized, and flashy production can be performed to enhance the production effect. That is, in the second half of the effect in the variable display game when the starting memory tends to accumulate to the upper limit (for example, 4), the player who is stopping the game does not observe the game balls around the starting winning opening 36, the stage part 40b, etc. Therefore, even if the virtual image of the frame element is intensely reflected in the glass frame 15, the performance effect of the SP ready-to-play performance can be enhanced without affecting the game performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The luminous intensity of the frame decoration device 18 is high, and the reflection of the virtual image of the frame element in the glass frame 15 is emphasized. Therefore, the visibility of the board elements does not deteriorate more than necessary, and the player can also observe the board elements.

After that, when the SP ready-to-win effect ends at time (H), the effect control device 300 changes the light emission intensity of the board decoration device 46 (board element) and the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) from strong to weak. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the end of the SP ready-to-win effect by visually recognizing that the luminous intensity of the board element and the frame element becomes weak when the SP ready-to-win effect on the display screen ends.

Note that, when emphasizing the reflection of the virtual image of the frame element in the glass frame 15, the effect control device 300 may not only increase the light emission intensity but also emphasize the reflection by blinking. In addition, the effect control device 300 changes the color of the frame element's luminous color according to the degree of expectation of the big win, thereby changing the color of the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the glass frame 15 to suggest the degree of expectation of the big win. good too.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300, in addition to the SP reach effect described above, the effect of emphasizing the reflection of the virtual image of the frame element in the glass frame 15, when the big win pattern is stopped, during the fanfare effect, during the ending effect, right It can be executed when hitting, when hitting back to the left, and so on. In addition, when the jackpot pattern is stopped, an effect may be performed in which the virtual image of the frame element in the glass frame 15 is emphasized and reflected in the specific area 86 (V prize opening), the normal pattern start gate 34 (pounding gate), etc. . In this way, the production control device 300 controls the reflection of the virtual image of the frame element in the glass frame 15 in accordance with the game, so that each production effect can be enhanced and the player can be suggested how to play. .

Further, in the above timing chart, the effect control device 300 controls the luminous intensity of the frame element and the board element during the effect in one variable display game, and reflects the virtual image of the frame element into the glass frame 15. Although the effect of letting the player win is performed, the effect may be performed over a plurality of times of the variable display game.

For example, the effect control device 300 is a continuous notice (chance notice), which is an effect of displaying a decorative special pattern that is out of a common mode over a plurality of times of the variable display game, and a start memory related to suspension during standby (before digestion). When performing a look-ahead notice for notifying the degree of expectation of a big hit, an effect can be performed in which a virtual image of the frame element is reflected in the glass frame 15.例文帳に追加

[Actions and effects of the second embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing games (variation display game, special figure variation display game) and effect control means (game control device 100) capable of executing effects related to the game. Effect control device 300), and when the result of the game is a special result (big win), a special game state (big win game, big win state) advantageous to the player can be generated. The game machine 10 includes a transparent member (for example, a cover glass 14) formed on the front surface of the game board 30 so that the game board 30 can be visually recognized, and an effect arranged around the transparent member according to the effect executed by the effect control means. frame elements (production button 25, protruding production unit 13, frame decoration device 18, etc.) that can emit light, and board elements arranged on the game board 30 (life nail 36b, start winning opening 36, stage part 40b, movable role object 40f, board decoration device 46, etc.). The board element overlaps with the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the transparent member, and is subject to predetermined conditions (when automatically moving in response to the player's operation or performance, when starting right-handed or returning to left-handed, when the player (in the case of manual operation) is established, the virtual image of the frame element does not overlap.

According to such a game machine 10, the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the transparent member can be prevented from overlapping the board element, and the visibility of the board element is improved, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the frame element moves from an initial position where it overlaps the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the transparent member to a position where it does not overlap the virtual image of the frame element (front, back, front) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. tilted position, lateral).

According to such a game machine 10, it is possible to prevent the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the transparent member from overlapping the board element due to the physical movement of the frame element. It can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a transparent member (for example, a cover glass 14) formed on the front surface of the gaming board 30 so that the gaming board 30 can be visually recognized, and an effect control device provided around the transparent member. A frame element (production button 25, projecting production unit 13, frame decoration device 18, etc.) that can emit light according to the production executed by the means (production control device 300), and a board element (life nail) arranged on the game board 30 36b, starting prize-winning port 36, stage part 40b, movable accessory 40f, board decoration device 46, etc.). The board element does not overlap the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the transparent member, and overlaps the virtual image of the frame element when predetermined conditions (at the time of right-handed hitting, at the end of right-handed hitting) are satisfied.

According to such a game machine 10, since the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the transparent member is intentionally superimposed on the board element when a predetermined condition is established, unexpectedness is generated and the performance effect can be enhanced. At the same time, it is possible to suggest a game (suggestion of how to play), and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, by reflecting a virtual image of the frame element on the board element where it is difficult to provide a light emitting member (LED), an optical performance using reflected light can be performed, so that the decorativeness can be easily and inexpensively enhanced. , can improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the board element (movable accessory) starts from an initial position (accommodated position within the game board 30) that does not overlap the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the transparent member, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is displaceable (operable, movable) to a position overlapping the virtual image of the frame element (behind the transparent member). Alternatively, the frame element (for example, the effect button 25) is moved from a position where the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the transparent member does not overlap the board element (for example, the position after movement in FIG. 53), and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the frame element can be displaced (operable, movable) to a position where the virtual image of is superimposed on the board element (for example, the initial position in FIG. 53).

According to such a game machine 10, the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the transparent member overlaps with the board element, so that the board element becomes brighter in a manner different from the usual, so that unexpectedness is generated and the amusement of the game is enhanced. can be improved.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing games (variation display game, special figure variation display game), and effect control capable of executing effects related to the game. means (production control device 300); The gaming machine 10 includes a transparent member (for example, a cover glass 14) arranged in front of the gaming machine 10, and a first gaming machine configuration arranged in front of the gaming machine 10 from the transparent member and capable of emitting light in a predetermined manner. Elements (frame elements (effect button 25, projecting effect unit 13, frame decoration device 18, etc.)) and second game machine components (board elements (life nail 36b, A start winning port 36, a stage portion 40b, a movable accessory 40f, a board decoration device 46, etc.)). The second gaming machine component overlaps with the virtual image of the first gaming machine component reflected in the transparent member, and a predetermined condition (when automatically moving in response to the player's operation or performance, starting right hand hitting) In the case of returning to time, left-handed, or in the case of manual operation by the player), the virtual image of the first gaming machine component does not overlap.

According to such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to prevent the virtual image of the first gaming machine component (frame element) reflected in the transparent member from overlapping with the second gaming machine component (board element). Since the visibility of the components is improved, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes display means (display screen of the display device 41) capable of displaying a predetermined effect, a transparent member (for example, the cover glass 14) disposed in front of the gaming machine 10, A first game machine component (frame element (effect button 25, projecting effect unit 13, frame decoration device 18, etc.)) disposed in front of the game machine 10 and capable of emitting light in a predetermined manner, and a transparent member. A second game machine component (board element (life nail 36b, start winning opening 36, stage part 40b, movable accessory 40f, board decoration device 46, etc.)) disposed behind the game machine than the member. . The second game machine component overlaps the virtual image of the first game machine component reflected in the transparent member, and does not overlap the virtual image of the first game machine component when a predetermined condition (for example, pseudo-continuous effect) is established. The effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute a specific effect (for example, effects 2 and 3 (second and third pseudo-continuous effect single effects)) on the display means when a predetermined condition is established.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the specific effect is executed in a state in which the virtual image of the first gaming machine constituent element (frame element) reflected in the transparent member does not overlap with the second gaming machine constituent element (board element). Therefore, the visibility of the components of the second game machine and the display means is improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes are possible within the scope of its technical idea, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. is. For example, it is possible to combine multiple embodiments. Also, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, and is intended to include all changes within the scope of the claims and equivalent meanings and contents.

For example, when a frame element or a board element has a specific light emission mode, an image notifying that it is in a specific light emission mode is displayed at a position where the virtual image of the frame element does not appear (for example, area A to area B in FIG. 53). display area (display area on the display screen of the display device 41, display area of other board elements or frame elements) in an area other than the glass frame 15, a position shifted from the front such as the right side or the upper right part of the glass frame 15 can be In this way, by displaying the image notifying the specific light emission mode at a position where the virtual image of the frame element is not reflected (position where it does not overlap with the virtual image of the frame element), the player can easily gaze at the image. Therefore, even if reflection occurs, the player's line of sight can be diverted to another location (the display device 41 as a board element or another board element or frame element) away from the virtual image of the frame element, and the game can be played. can improve the interest of

Also, in order to make it difficult to see that the frame element is reflected, the board element or the light-emitting members arranged near the board element may have the same or the same color as the frame element. For example, if the luminescence mode of the frame element is a cyclic luminescence mode in which colors are switched, the luminescence mode of the board element can also be a cyclic luminescence mode. At that time, the effect control device 300 may make the player easily recognize which light is emitted by making the color and the speed of circulation different as the cyclic light emission modes of the frame element and the board element. In addition, the continuation of the lighting mode of the frame element may be executed by the lighting mode of the board element or the lighting mode of the light-emitting member near the board element, and a series of effects may be executed using the reflection ( A natural presentation may be performed, or the frame element may continue the lighting mode of the board element).

Furthermore, the shape of the board element and the frame element can be various shapes. For example, when the board element is circular and the frame element is semicircular, even if the frame element is reflected on the circular board element, it can be made inconspicuous by overlapping with the light emission of the circular board element. Also, the virtual image of the frame element may be made relatively inconspicuous by making the light emission mode of the board element more conspicuous than the frame element by setting the light emission mode of the board element to rainbow color, high-speed cyclic lighting, or the like. Furthermore, the effect control device 300 displays a display (for example, effect) corresponding to the board element in the vicinity of the board element (for example, the lower right corner of the display screen) on the display screen of the display device 41, thereby making the board element conspicuous. You may allow

Based on the above description, representative aspects of the present invention other than those described in the claims are as follows.

(1) Display control means for performing a variable display game by variably displaying a plurality of symbol objects on a display device is provided, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. In the gaming machine, the display control means makes the size of the symbol object displayed temporarily or stopped at the end of the variable display game larger than the size of the symbol object during the specific display period. Amusement machine.

10 game machine 25 effect button 30 game board 32 game area 36 first start winning opening (first start winning area)
37 normal variable winning device (second starting winning area)
39 Special Variable Winning Device 40 Center Case 41 Display Device 50 Collective Display Device (LED)
100 Game control device (main board)
200 Payout control device 300 Effect control device (sub board)
633b Decorative objects

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine comprising display control means for performing a variable display game by variably displaying a symbol object on a display device,
a transparent member disposed in front of the game machine;
a gaming machine component disposed in front of the gaming machine relative to the transparent member and capable of emitting light in a predetermined manner;
The display control means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the size of the symbol object temporarily stopped or stopped when the variable display game ends can be made different from the size of the symbol object during a specific display period.

Images